JP6859773B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some such gaming machine, for example, there are a plurality kinds types per having different number of rounds are provided, by varying the game value that can be acquired, there is what is sought on Xing taste.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

However, that a further interest towards the top has been demanded.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, that are intended to provide a gaming machine which can improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a privilege ball entering means in which a predetermined privilege is given based on the ball entering the game ball, and the game ball enters the privilege ball entering means. A variable means that can be changed to a first position where the ball is possible and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. , The discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information to be used for the discrimination of the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means are specified in advance. Discrimination information storage means that can be stored until it is used for discrimination of the discrimination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and its dynamic Based on the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the display means and the determination result of the determination means being a predetermined first determination result. The variable means during the first period, which is the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the first determination result until the new determination by the determination means becomes feasible. variable aspect is based on the fact that a and variable control means for controlling such that, the determination result determination result is the first of said discriminating means and the second determination result which is different from the first variable aspect of the The game state setting means capable of setting a game state different from the game state at the time when the determination corresponding to the second determination result is executed, and the determination result of the determination means become the second determination result. Based on the above, the variable game executing means for executing the variable game in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the variable game executed by the variable game executing means are as described above. in first variable game and, third variable aspect different from the second variable manner specific variable manner as a hard appearance which is distinguished from the first variable aspect is variably previous SL changing means in a second variable aspect at least includes A type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a second variable game in which the variable means is variable, and the first determination result of the specific number with respect to the discrimination information storage means. in situations where the discrimination information corresponding is stored, from said dynamically displayed is started identification information, the first of said determination information corresponding to the first of said discrimination information of said discriminating information for a specific number of At the start of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to A variable mode of the variable means during a predetermined first period until a discrimination result corresponding to the discrimination information finally used for discrimination among the discrimination information stored in another information storage means is shown. , The means having an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from a part of the second variable aspect, and the discrimination information corresponding to the specific number of the first discrimination results with respect to the discrimination information storage means in a predetermined gaming state. When stored, after the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first discrimination information among the specific number of the discrimination information is started, the identification information corresponding to the first discrimination information During the predetermined first period until the discrimination result corresponding to the discrimination information finally used for the discrimination is shown among the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means at the start of the dynamic display. As the effect of the above, the variable means is variable in the second variable mode based on the means for executing the first effect and the determination result of the determination means becoming the second determination result in the predetermined gaming state. As the effect while being performed, the means for executing the second effect configured to include at least a specific effect mode capable of suggesting the same game as the game suggested by the first effect, and the discriminating information storage means. When the discrimination information is stored, the discrimination information can be used to suggest to the player that the discrimination using the stored discrimination information may result in the first discrimination result. A means that can be executed before being used for discriminating the means is provided, and the probability that the discriminating result of the discriminating means becomes the first discriminating result is the probability that the discriminating result other than the first discriminating result is obtained. Is set higher than .

The gaming machine according to claim 2 includes a launching means capable of launching a game ball in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

According to the game machine of the present invention , a privilege ball entering means to which a predetermined privilege is given based on the ball entering the game ball, and a first position where the game ball can enter the privilege ball entering means. And the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, the variable means which can be changed , the discrimination means which executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination means. The discriminant information acquisition means that acquires discriminant information for use based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the discriminant information acquired by the discriminant information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Discrimination information storage means that can be stored until it is used for discrimination of the discrimination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the identification information by the dynamic display means. Based on the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in the dynamic display and the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result, the first determination result is determined. The variable mode of the variable means during the first period, which is the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for showing to the enablement of new discrimination by the discriminating means, is the first variable. and variable control means for controlling so that aspect, based on the fact that a second determination result different from the determination result determination result is the first of said discriminating means, corresponding to the second determination result Based on the game state setting means capable of setting a game state different from the game state at the time when the determination is executed and the determination result of the determination means being the second determination result, the variable means The first variable mode is distinguished from the variable game execution means that executes the variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the variable game that is executed by the variable game execution means. It said varying means is varied by the first variable game and, third variable aspect different from the second variable manner specific variable manner as a hard appearance is variable previous SL changing means in a second variable aspect at least includes A type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a second variable game, and the discrimination information corresponding to the specific number of the first discrimination results are stored in the discrimination information storage means. In this situation, after the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first discrimination information among the specific number of the discrimination information is started, the identification information corresponding to the first discrimination information is displayed . It is stored in the discrimination information storage means at the start of the dynamic display. Which was a variable manner of the variable means between the last predetermined first period until the determination information corresponding determination result to the used in the determination is indicated in the determination information, the second variable aspect When the means having an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from a part and the discrimination information corresponding to the specific number of the first discrimination results are stored in the discrimination information storage means in a predetermined gaming state, the above-mentioned After the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first discrimination information among the specific number of the discrimination information is started, at the start time of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first discrimination information. A first effect is produced during a predetermined first period until a determination result corresponding to the discrimination information finally used for discrimination is shown in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means. As an effect while the variable means is variable in the second variable mode based on the means for executing the above and the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result in the predetermined gaming state. The discrimination information is stored in the means for executing the second effect, which includes at least a specific effect mode capable of suggesting the same game as the game suggested by the first effect, and the discrimination information storage means. If so, the discriminant information can be used to discriminate the discriminant means by providing an effect that can suggest to the player the possibility that the discriminant using the stored discriminant information will result in the first discriminant result. The probability that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result is set higher than the probability that the discrimination result other than the first discrimination result becomes the discrimination result . ..

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 on the La-La line of FIG. 5 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 on the Lb-Lb line of FIG. 5 (c). Yes, (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65. (A) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the switching member is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path, and (b) is a special view in which the flow path solenoid is inactive. It is a rear view of the back cover body which shows the state which the guide piece of a switching member is blocking the opening surface of the entrance of a discharge flow path. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the three symbol display devices in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the jackpot displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the entry into the second entrance during the jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode at the time of detecting. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the door breakthrough mode effect executed with the start of the ending period after all the rounds of the jackpot are completed in the first embodiment, (b). Is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first door is breached in the door breakthrough mode effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the door breakthrough mode effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment fails to break through the fourth door. b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when all the doors are successfully breached in the door breakthrough mode effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the state of the specific winning opening when shifting to the probability variation mode, and (b) is the second reserved ball of the second special symbol. Is a jackpot F, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the state of the specific winning opening when shifting to the normal mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the first embodiment, and (b) is a random number table per first set in the ROM of the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation contents schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first type selection table, and (b) is the main control in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the 2nd random number table set in the ROM of the apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the table for special figure 1 (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 off (normal) table, and (d) is a figure showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 off (probability change) table. It is a figure which showed the contents schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot (4 fluctuations or less) table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot (5 fluctuations or more) table. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the table for special figure 2 deviation (4 fluctuations or less), and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 deviation (5 fluctuations or more). ) Is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the table. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the state transition method in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. .. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle prize processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the end of a small hit executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed several command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table, and (b) is the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the 1st type selection table set in the ROM of. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the 2nd random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the state transition method in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command setting process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-time state determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the breakthrough mode selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is in a protruding state (a state in which three balls, which is the upper limit number, is stored above the storage valve) in the modified example of the second embodiment. (B) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is in a buried state in the modified example of the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the state transition method in the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and entry ports 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, general winning openings 63, and the first. It is configured by assembling one ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, a distribution member 660, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out opening 66 and the winning opening.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a normal entry opening. When 67 is passed, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is judged as a special symbol big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until seven balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are six types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" to "big hit F". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game is based on the result of the jackpot game. Value (game value) is given to the player. The three types of "big hits A to C" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The three types of "big hits D to F" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the lottery of the special symbol executed when the ball enters the first entry port 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball enters the second entry. The lottery of the special symbol executed when the ball enters the ball mouth 640 is called the second special symbol lottery.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is determined for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball opening 64 is changed to an open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the first ball opening 64 is opened. Be released. In the normal state, since the electric accessory 64a is arranged at the closed position, the right side and the left side of the first entry port 64 in the front view are closed. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) for a ball that has rolled toward the first entrance 64 from the right side and the left side of the front view to enter the first entrance 64 due to being blocked by the electric accessory 64a. ). Therefore, in a normal state, basically, only a ball that has flowed down from vertically above the first ball entry port 64 can enter the first ball entry port 64. On the other hand, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a is opened, so that the ball that has rolled from the right side and the left side of the front view toward the first entrance 64 is the first entrance 64. As a result, it becomes easier to draw a special symbol.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, six types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" are provided.

When "Big hit A" and "Big hit D" are reached, the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16 rounds big hit). On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5 rounds big hit), when it becomes "big hit C", it becomes a special game state of 2 rounds, and when it becomes "big hit E", it becomes. When the number of rounds becomes 7 rounds of special game state (7 rounds jackpot) and becomes "big hit F", the number of rounds becomes 6 rounds of special game state (6 rounds jackpot). Further, when the specific conditions are satisfied during each of the above jackpot games (when the ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 passes through the probability change switch 65e3 described later), a high probability state (special) of the special symbol is achieved after the jackpot ends. (During the probability change of the design). Also, if a high probability state of a special symbol is given,
The probability of hitting a normal symbol is also increased (the time saving state of a normal symbol is given). The high-probability state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol continue from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. On the other hand, if the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the special symbol is in the low probability state until the next jackpot, and the normal symbol hits. The probability is also the normal probability (it becomes the normal state of the normal symbol).

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (low probability state of a special symbol). Further, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (high probability state of the normal symbol) means a gaming state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time saving state", it is called the "normal symbol normal state" (normal symbol low probability state), which means that the normal symbol hit probability is higher than the normal state, that is, during the time saving. Indicates a state in which the probability of hitting is low.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the normal symbol time reduction period.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all 5 rounds). Further, in the present embodiment, the "probability change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" given after the big hit are continued until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "probability change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" may be limited to the time when the number of lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of lottery in which the "special symbol is probable change state" and the number of lottery in which the "normal symbol is in a time-saving state" may be different. Further, the number of lottery may be changed according to the type of jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "normal state of the normal symbol". Then, when it becomes a big hit and the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, it shifts from the "low probability state of the special symbol" to the "probability change state of the special symbol" and from the "normal state of the normal symbol". It shifts to the "normal symbol time saving state". In this case, the set "probability change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, if the ball never passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot of 1, it shifts to the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "normal state of the normal symbol". Although the details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when the "big hits A to D" are reached, the ball easily passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and when the "big hits E and F" are reached, the jackpot is hit. It becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be one of "big hits A to C", so there is a high possibility that after the end of the big hit, there will be a "probability change state of the special symbol" and a "time saving state of the normal symbol". On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, it will be one of "big hits D to F". Further, as will be described in detail later, the ratio of “big hit D” when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol is 5%. Therefore, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, it will be a "big hit E, F" with a high probability (95% ratio), so that after the big hit is finished, it is disadvantageous for the player "low probability state of the special symbol". And there is a high probability that it will be in the "normal state of a normal symbol". Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the lottery of the first special symbol.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by a lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the ball. The number of times is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (special symbol according to the jackpots A to F). (1st symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with this as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by imitating the numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 4/5 of the upper side is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/5 is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls, the notice character, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 0.5 seconds. By displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (0.5 seconds or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is determined). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not it is a big hit). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, when the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and the reserved ball exists, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stopped display. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time. Further, when both the reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol and the reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol exist, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol has priority. Will be executed.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the ball corresponds to the new entry. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64 and the second entry port 640, the ball that has not been changed has not been executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of (held balls), is displayed by the number of reserved symbols indicating each reserved ball.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 7B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a maximum of four reserved symbols displayed as black circles are displayed on the right side and the left side of the front view. The reserved symbol displayed on the right side of the front view corresponds to the lottery of the first special symbol (first reserved symbol), and the reserved symbol displayed on the right side of the front view corresponds to the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a reserved symbol (second reserved symbol). FIG. 7B illustrates a case where three first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank). There is.

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lighting state.

The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display or fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the normal symbol (second symbol) are displayed. A variable display is performed in which the symbols are alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol hold lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, but is 3 times or less, or 3 times or less, as in the case of the 1st ball entrance 64 and the 2nd ball entrance 640. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. The first ball entry port 64 is provided with a pair of electric accessory 64a that can be opened and closed on each of the left and right sides. When the electric accessory 64a is opened, the first ball entry port 64 is vertically above. In addition to the ball that has flowed down from, a ball that has flowed down from the left and right can also enter. The first ball entry port 64 is a ball (left-struck ball) that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 regardless of whether or not the electric accessory 64a is in the open state. The nails and the like are arranged so that the ball can easily enter the ball as compared with the ball flowing down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the ball hit to the right).

A second ball entry port 640, through which a ball can enter, is arranged on the upper right side of the front view with respect to the first ball entry port 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second entry slot 640 is also one of the winning openings in which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, since the second entry port 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, basically, the ball flowing down the flow path provided in the right direction of the variable display device unit 80. However, it is easier to enter the ball than the ball flowing down the flow path provided in the left direction of the variable display device unit 80.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the front view of the second ball opening 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until seven balls are won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The specific winning opening 65a and the second entry opening 640 are located at positions where a ball (a ball hit right) that has flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 can enter (easy entry). Is located in. In other words, the ball flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). Therefore, in order for the player to receive the prize ball from being paid out (profit) during the jackpot, the ball should be hit to the right.

Inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which the ball can pass are provided (see FIGS. 6A and 6B). The ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 flows down one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 that gives a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol after a big hit by passing a ball. The special discharge flow path 65e2 is in a state where it can pass only in the first round of the jackpot. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the ball can be easily entered into the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a maximum of 30 seconds). (Big hits A to D) and big hits (Big hits E and F) where it is difficult to put the ball into the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened only for 0.2 seconds at the maximum) are provided. ..

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c and for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an arranged LED substrate 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opening / closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the game that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i locked with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the side and operates the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, in the open state of the opening / closing door 65f1, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently used as the specific winning opening. You can win a prize within 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5B. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2. To. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is detected as an out ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the probability variation state of the special symbol ( Probability change game state) is set. That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probability change game state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, since the game state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game. .. The operation of the switching member 65h is linked to the first round of the jackpot, and while the switching member 65h operates at the position where the special discharge flow path 65e2 is opened at the same time as the start of the first round of the jackpot, the jackpot At the same time as the end of the first round, the switching member 65h operates at a position where the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed. Further, the time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 0.2 seconds at the shortest. There is. As described above, in the jackpots E and F, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 is 0.2 seconds at the maximum, so unless the opening / closing door 65f1 can be opened and the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a at the same time. , The special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed by the guide piece 65h2 before the sphere flows into the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the jackpots are E and F, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot of 1.

Next, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a ball discharge port switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. Thereby, whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged can be determined by the total of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the problem can be detected at an early stage.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the prize ball (11 for one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. (Prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery for whether or not to give the probability change game state can be executed. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probabilistic gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. A substantially semicircular distribution member 660 is provided on the upper right side of the front view with respect to the variable winning device 65. The distribution member 660 is provided with receiving portions on the left and right sides capable of receiving the balls flowing down from above. The distribution member 660 has an arrangement in which the receiving portion on the right side is directly below the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and an arrangement in which the receiving portion on the left side is directly below the flow path. Can be arranged on the street. FIG. 2 illustrates an arrangement in which the receiving portion on the right side is directly below the flow path.

When the ball flowing down the flow path is received by the right receiving part in a state where the receiving part on the right side is directly below the flow path, the distribution member 660 is affected by the weight of the ball. As a result of rotating in the clockwise direction, the receiving portion on the left side is arranged to be directly below the flow path. Further, since the receiving portion on the right side is tilted in the lower right direction in the front view due to the rotation, the ball rolls along the tilt and flows down in the lower right direction of the distribution member 660. The sphere that has flowed down to the lower right of the distribution member 660 rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 along the flow path. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is set to the open state, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a.

If the ball flowing down the flow path is received by the left receiving part while the receiving part on the left side is located directly below the flow path, the distribution member 660 will be affected by the weight of the ball. As a result of rotating in the counterclockwise direction, the receiving portion on the right side is arranged to be directly below the flow path. Further, since the receiving portion on the left side is tilted in the lower left direction in the front view due to the rotation, the ball rolls along the tilt and flows down in the lower left direction of the distribution member 660. The ball that has flowed down to the lower left of the distribution member 660 flows down toward the second entry port 640 along the flow path, and about 80% of the balls enter the second entry port 640.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the ball launched into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the ball launched to the right) is directed by the distribution member 660 in the direction of the variable winning device 65. And the direction of the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit), when a right-handed hit is made in order to win a ball into the specific winning opening 65a and obtain a winning ball, the ball goes to the second winning opening 640 during the big hit. Enter a large amount of balls. As a result, in most cases, at the end of the jackpot, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated up to the value (4).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit type (big hit E, F) in which the ball is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 has a high probability (95%). It is determined. Further, in each of the jackpots E and F, the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in each round is extremely short (0.2 seconds), and it is difficult to insert the ball during the jackpot. Therefore, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a high probability (95%) that the prize ball can hardly be obtained, and the game state after the big hit is also a disadvantageous big hit type. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is an unfavorable lottery, and it is possible to make the player want to execute only the lottery of the first special symbol as much as possible.

However, as described above, if a ball is won in the specific winning opening 65a in the jackpot and a right-handed hit is made in order to obtain the winning ball, the ball also enters the second winning opening 640, so at least the jackpot is hit. After the end, the lottery of the second special symbol held during the jackpot will be executed. Therefore, after the big hit, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is played in the hope that the lottery of the special symbol will not be a big hit until there are no reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol. As expected by the player, if all the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are out of order, only the first special symbol lottery can be performed by left-handing, so that the player can perform the lottery. The game can be continued without reducing the number of balls held until the type of jackpot (big hits A to C) is relatively advantageous for the player.

Further, in the first embodiment, when one ball enters the second entry port 640, one prize ball is given. When right-handed, one ball is distributed to the second entry port 640 by the distribution member 660, so that all the balls distributed in the direction of the second entry port 640 are second. Even if the ball enters the entrance 640, only half of the ball launched by right-handed hitting is paid out by the prize ball. Therefore, when the ball is hit right, the number of balls held is likely to decrease, and the merit of hitting right can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is performed during normal times (a state other than during a big hit).

As described above, in the first embodiment, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big hit is completed, it is disadvantageous for the player, and all the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are removed. If so, it will be advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the result of the lottery for a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the jackpot is completed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not win in any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be returned to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, the characteristic effect of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, which is executed in the main display area Dm, will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a right-handed hit is made aiming at the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot, the ball enters the second entry opening 640 and the second special symbol is completed before the jackpot ends. The number of reserved balls is configured to reach the upper limit. If a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game hoping that the lottery will be missed during the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. In the first embodiment, whether or not the reserved ball includes a lottery result that is a big hit of the second special symbol until all the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is completed. It is configured to execute an effect that suggests.

First, with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B, the effect executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 8A, during the jackpot, an effect of the adventurer 811 exploring the cave is displayed. Further, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR1 is displayed on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81. The current number of rounds is displayed in this display area HR1. In the example of FIG. 8A, the character "1st round" is displayed, indicating that the present is the 1st round.

On the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally long rectangular display area HR2 is displayed. In this display area HR2, the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entered into the specific winning opening 65a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 8A, the characters "GET 0022" are displayed in the display area HR2, and 22 prize balls have been paid out (that is, two balls have been identified since the jackpot started. It indicates that the ball has entered the winning opening 65a).

Further, four display areas HR3a to HR3d are displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. Although the details will be described later, the four display areas HR3a to HR3d show the degree of expectation of the reserved ball of the second special symbol increased by the ball entering the second entry port 640 during the jackpot. The image is displayed. As described above, it is more likely that a player will get a better result than a big hit if the lottery of the second special symbol is missed. Therefore, the display areas HR3a to HR3d are considered to be missed. An image showing the degree of expectation is displayed.

Note that FIG. 8A illustrates a state in which there is no reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, and each display area HR3a to HR3d is marked with a “?”. The image is displayed.

FIG. 8B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected during the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 8B, when a ball entering the second entrance 640 is detected during the jackpot, the adventurer 811 discovers the treasure box 812. This treasure box contains the key 813, and the mode of the key 813 suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the second special symbol held based on the entry will be missed. The more luxurious the mode of the key 813, the higher the expectation of loss, and the poorer the mode, the lower the expectation of loss (the risk of winning in the second special symbol lottery increases).

FIG. 8B illustrates the case where the key 813 in the normal mode is displayed. When the adventurer 811 discovers the key 813, the key having the same aspect as the discovered aspect is displayed on the upper side of the display areas HR3a to HR3d with respect to the display area where "?" Is displayed. It is displayed in order from the area. In the example of FIG. 8B, the case where the image of the key 813 is displayed in the display area HR3a in the display area in which the symbol “?” Is displayed is illustrated. In this way, by displaying the mode of each key 813 discovered by the adventurer 811 in the display areas HR3a to HR3d, the variable display based on each reserved ball executed after the end of this jackpot is completed. The player can confirm the degree of expectation of the above at any time. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the main display area Dm is provided with dedicated display areas HR3a to HR3d for displaying the expected degree of the reserved ball of the second special symbol, but the display is not necessarily dedicated. There is no need to provide an area. For example, the reserved symbol of the second special symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds may be displayed in the form of the key discovered by the adventurer 811.

FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the ending effect after all the rounds of the jackpot have been completed. In the first embodiment, from the ending period of the jackpot to the lapse of the fluctuation time of all the fluctuation displays based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the jackpot E, in the reserved ball of the second special symbol, An effect of notifying the player whether or not F exists is executed. That is, it suggests whether or not the game state remains in the "probability change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" even after all the fluctuation displays based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol are completed. The production for is executed. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the "probability change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol", which are the game states advantageous to the player, are referred to as the "probability change mode", which is disadvantageous to the player. The "low-probability state of the special symbol" and the "normal state of the normal symbol", which are the game states, are referred to as the "normal mode".

As shown in FIG. 9A, when the ending period of the jackpot starts, the adventurer 811 discovers the door 814. Further, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR4 is formed above the image of the door 814. In this display area HR4, the characters "Door mode started !! Break through the four doors !!" are displayed. With these display contents, it is advantageous for the player if the four doors can be opened by using the four keys (displayed in the display areas HR3a to HR3d) collected during the jackpot (holding ball of the second special symbol). It is possible to easily make the player understand that the probabilistic mode continues even after the player is digested. Further, in the display area HR1 on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, an image of an arrow pointing to the left and the character "left-handed" are displayed. With these displays, the player can launch the ball to the left (the ball is launched into the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80).

The reason why the left-handed hit is notified at the start of the ending period is to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed after the end of the big hit. That is, the ball launched by the player right-handed during the ending period is the second entrance 640 after the end of the jackpot (and after the fluctuation based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started). Prevents the number of lottery of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot from increasing (the lottery of the second special symbol is executed beyond the four times held during the jackpot). This is to (suppress). As described above, even if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the prize ball can hardly be obtained during the big hit, and the game state after the big hit becomes a disadvantageous normal mode for the player. Therefore, as the number of lottery of the second special symbol increases, it becomes disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from continuing to hit right after the jackpot and a new ball entering the second entrance 640, in the first embodiment, the game is played from the ending period. It is configured to notify the person of the left-handed strike. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot can be limited to the reserved ball of the second special symbol held during the jackpot, which is excessively disadvantageous to the player. Can be prevented (suppressed).

When the jackpot (special game state) ends with the end of the ending period, as shown in FIG. 9B, the effect of breaking through the door 614 using the keys collected during the jackpot is executed. FIG. 9B illustrates a case where the adventurer 811 succeeds in breaking through the door 814 by using the key displayed in the display area HR3a. If the breakthrough is successful, an image in which the door 614 is opened is displayed, and the characters "breakthrough !!" are displayed for the display area HR4. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that if the player breaks through the remaining three doors, the player will be in an advantageous state (probability change mode).

The effect of breaking through the door 614 is basically executed in conjunction with the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. That is, the effect that the adventurer 811 opens (breaks through) the first door using the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR3a) is based on the first reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is executed in the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the fluctuation display based on the second reserved ball. Similarly, the effect that the adventurer 811 uses the second key to open the second door is the third since the variable display based on the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is started. It is executed until the variable display based on the reserved ball is started. The effect that the adventurer 811 uses the third key to open the third door is the fourth reserved ball after the variable display based on the third reserved ball of the second special symbol is started. It is executed until the variable display based on the start is started. The effect of opening the fourth door using the fourth key is executed at the variation time of the variation display based on the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol. It should be noted that these are operations when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the result of the lottery corresponding to the loss, and if the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the door is breached during the jackpot period. The production is performed one or more times.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, but in the first embodiment, it is difficult to detect whether or not the second special symbol has become a big hit from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the variable winning device 65. When the second special symbol is removed, the release (so-called small hit) accompanied by the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 is determined. Then, the opening period (0.2 seconds) of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 in each round in the case of a big hit E or F in the lottery of the second special symbol are set. Matching. Further, when the jackpots are E and F, the interval period between rounds is made to match the fluctuation time (1 second) when the second special symbol is missed in the lottery. With this configuration, even if the jackpot E or jackpot F is reached during the execution of the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the current jackpot is already in progress due to the opening period and opening interval of the opening / closing door 65f1. It can be difficult to determine whether or not it is. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the series of effects (door breakthrough mode effects) executed at the start of the ending period until the end.

FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the door breakthrough mode effect fails to break through the fourth door. That is, it is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case where any of the jackpot E and F is included in the holding ball of the 2nd special symbol. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the adventurer 811 fails to break through the door, the characters "failure ..." are displayed in the display area HR4, and the adventurer 811 possesses it. The effect of breaking the key is executed. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that the probability variation mode has ended (either jackpot E or F has been won).

FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the fourth door is successfully breached in the door breakthrough mode effect. In this case, an image in which the fourth door is opened is displayed, and the characters "great success !!" and "probability change mode entry !!" are displayed in the display area HR4. With these display modes, it is possible to easily understand that the player can play the game in a probabilistic mode that is advantageous to the player.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the above-mentioned door breakthrough is performed from the start of the ending period of the jackpot to the end of the variation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol increased during the jackpot. It is configured to execute mode production. By this door breakthrough mode production, all the fluctuation displays based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol are removed, and whether it is possible to play the game in the probabilistic mode, the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved ball, and in the probabilistic mode It is possible to suggest to the player whether the player will fall into the normal mode without drawing the first special symbol. By configuring a series of effects to be executed over the ending period and a plurality of variable displays after the big hit, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, the game after all the variation display based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol is completed depending on whether or not the number of doors corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be breached. Although it was configured to notify whether or not the state is in the probabilistic mode, the effect mode is not limited to this. It suffices if one of the two types of results (success or failure, victory, defeat, confirmation, or loss, etc.) is finally notified. For example, the adventurer 811 is an enemy. If you fight and defeat the enemy, the probability change mode may be notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the correspondence between the time-dependent change of the effect mode during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and the time-dependent change of the state of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing state of the opening / closing door 65f1) will be described. FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the probability variation mode is notified (that is, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are the lottery results corresponding to the deviation). On the other hand, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the normal mode is notified (that is, when either jackpot E or F is included in the hold).

As shown in FIG. 11A, when it is notified that the mode has changed to the probability variation mode (when the lottery of the second special symbol is completely missed), the door breakthrough mode production start screen (when the ending period starts and the door breakthrough mode effect starts (See FIG. 9A) is displayed. This start screen continues to be displayed for the ending period of 1 second, and the start screen ends when the ending period ends and the jackpot ends. When the jackpot ends and the variable display based on the first reserved ball (hold 1) of the second special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, the effect of breaking through the first door (FIG. 9 (b). ) Is started). This effect continues until the start timing of the fluctuation based on the second hold ball (hold 2). As described above, if the lottery for the second special symbol is missed, it will be a small hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the 1-second variation display based on the hold 1 is completed, the small hit is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. It is displayed that the door has been successfully breached according to this opening period.

After that, similarly, the fluctuation display for 1 second and the opening of the opening / closing door 65f1 for 0.2 seconds based on the small hit are repeated. Along with this, the effect of breaking through the second to fourth doors is executed by the third symbol display device 81, and it is notified (displayed) that the door can be broken through during each opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1. .. In this way, the result of whether or not the door can be broken through is notified during the opening period of the small hit after the fluctuation time has elapsed, so that the door can be broken through during the fluctuation period of 1 second. It is possible to raise the expectation for the door. In addition, since it is possible to draw more attention to the production during the opening period of the small hit, it is difficult for the player to think that it is already a hit from the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1. it can.

After the adventurer 811 breaks through the door 814 and is notified of the transition to the probabilistic mode (after the fourth small hit is completed), the display mode dedicated to the probabilistic mode is displayed. (Not shown) is displayed. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the mode has been changed to the probability change mode.

FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a case where the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is a jackpot F. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode effect, it is notified that the mode has been changed to the normal mode. In the case (when either the jackpot E or F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol), the door breakthrough mode effect is started at the start of the ending period. When the jackpot ends and the variable display of the special symbol based on the first reserved ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, the effect of breaking through the first door is executed, and the opening period of the small hit is executed. Adventurer 811 breaks through the first door at the same time.

When the variable display of the special symbol based on the second reserved ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, the effect of breaking through the second door is executed. At this time, the fluctuation display for 1 second is executed based on the second reserved ball, and the jackpot F is started after 1 second has elapsed. When the jackpot F is reached and the first round is started, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. According to this opening period, it is notified that the adventurer 811 has succeeded in breaking through the door. Then, at the start of the interval period after the end of the first round, an effect of trying to break through the third door is executed, and the opening period (0.2) of the second round after the interval period of 1 second has elapsed. During (seconds), it is notified that the third door has been successfully breached.

In addition, when the interval period after the end of the second round is started, the effect of breaking through the fourth door is executed, and the opening period of the third round (0. During (2 seconds), it is notified that the fourth door could not be breached (see FIG. 10 (a)).

After being notified that the door has failed to break through, a result display (not shown) showing the total number of prize balls paid out in this probabilistic mode will be executed until the end of the jackpot. When the jackpot is finished, it is set to the dedicated display mode of the normal mode.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the variable display is sequentially performed based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the big hit, the time of the state of the opening / closing door 65f1 when the variable display and the small hit are repeated. The change (see FIG. 11 (a)) and the change with time of the state of the opening / closing door 65f1 when the holding ball of the second special symbol contains the jackpot E or F (see FIG. 11 (b)) are at least. It is configured to match until the end of the door breakthrough mode production. That is, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 in each round of the jackpot E and F is configured to be 0.2 seconds, which is the same period as the opening period of the small hit. Further, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of the jackpots E and F are completed is set to 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. With this configuration, even if any of the 1st to 4th reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode production is completed. The operation of the door 65f1 can be the same as when the probability variation mode is notified (see FIG. 11A). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot is E or F from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1, so that the door breakthrough mode effect can be paid attention to the end. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Note that FIG. 11B exemplifies a mode in which even when the second reserved ball becomes a jackpot F (falls into the normal mode), the third door is broken through and the fourth door fails. However, if either the jackpot E or F is changed while the reserved ball of the second special symbol is being digested, the effect of failing to break through the door may be executed.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 17) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 17, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83. Used in.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 36). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first input. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball mouth 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. 2. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball into the ball entry port 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the ball entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is changed. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

As described above, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first random number counter. When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by the first hit random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 13 (b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is set. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are the first random numbers for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see FIG. 13B). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 4 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100". As shown in FIG. 13B, the random value (counter value) that becomes a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. On the other hand, random numbers other than the above-mentioned jackpot random numbers correspond to deviations. As mentioned above, the deviation of the special symbol includes a small hit. As shown in FIG. 13B, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the number of random numbers that are missed in the lottery of the first special symbol is 396 of "4 to 399". On the other hand, the number of random numbers that are missed in the lottery of the second special symbol is 37 of "3 to 40", and the random number values that are small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol are "41-399". There are 359 pieces.

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 40 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 39" are stored in the first random number table for the high probability (). See FIG. 13 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 40 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/10". In addition, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the number of random numbers that are lost in the lottery of the first special symbol is 360, which is "40 to 399". On the other hand, only "40" is specified as the random number value that is missed in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number value that becomes a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 359 of "41-399". The number is specified.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 14A, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9", the big hit type is "big hit A" ( It will be a 16-round probability change jackpot). The jackpot type when the value is "10 to 89" is "big hit B" (5-round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "90 to 99" is "big hit C". (2 round probability change jackpot).

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4", the big hit type is "big hit D" (16 round probability variation big hit). The jackpot type when the value is "5-49" is "big hit E" (normal jackpot for 7 rounds), and the jackpot type when the value is "50-99" is "big hit F". (6 rounds normal jackpot).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that six types of hit types (big hits A to F) are determined by the type of the special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. In other words, even if the jackpot type is decided, it is not certain whether or not it will shift to the probabilistic state. The above-mentioned "probability change jackpot" means a type of jackpot in which the ball easily passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and "normal jackpot" means a type of jackpot in which the ball does not easily pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Means.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99) that stops at the same time, and "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) that the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is the value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 15A), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. As shown in FIG. 15A, the variation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and is a table 202d1 for each special figure 1 (see FIG. 15B). At least a table 202d2 (see FIG. 15 (c)) for the special drawing 1 deviation (normal) and a table 202d3 (see FIG. 15 (d)) for the special drawing 1 deviation (probability variation) are defined. Further, as a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the lottery of the second special symbol, a table 202d4 for special figure 2 (4 fluctuations or less) (see FIG. 16A) and a special figure 2 (5 fluctuations or more) ) Table 202d5 (see FIG. 16 (b)), special figure 2 deviation (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 (see FIG. 16 (c)), and special figure 2 deviation (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d7 (FIG. 16 (d)) is specified at least.

First, the table 202d1 per special figure 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 15B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 1 per table 202d1. The special figure 1 hit table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is defined. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined respectively. In the special figure 1 per table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as a judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, various fluctuation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50", and various super reach are associated with the range of "51 to 179". Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Select from the special figure 1 per table 202d1.

FIG. 15 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 for detachment (normal). The deviation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. .. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of a special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set. Set (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back).

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short or a long deviation (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

For the out-of-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range of "0 to 149" for the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and various super reach out of the range of "150 to 197". (60 seconds), but "198" is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, the stop type is determined and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery of the special symbol is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back) is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming long at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

FIG. 16A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the table 202d4 for each special figure 2 (4 fluctuations or less). The table 202d4 for hitting the special figure 2 (4 fluctuations or less) is selected when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 times or less after the jackpot is completed and when the jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be performed. As shown in FIG. 16A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 or less after the big hit, the fluctuation time is a short fluctuation per second as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Be selected.

FIG. 16B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the table 202d5 for each special figure 2 (5 fluctuations or more). The table 202d5 for hitting the special figure 2 (5 fluctuations or more) is selected when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 times or more after the jackpot is completed and when the jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be performed. As shown in FIG. 16B, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is a long fluctuation per 300 seconds regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Be selected.

FIG. 16 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 2 deviation (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6. This special figure 2 off (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 is when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 times or less after the big hit is completed, and the second special symbol is missed (including small hits) by lottery. This is a data table that defines the type of fluctuation pattern (variation time) that is selected when the result is met. As shown in FIG. 16C, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 or less after the big hit, the fluctuation time is 1 second off short-circuit fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Be selected.

FIG. 16D is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the table 202d7 for deviation from Special Figure 2 (5 fluctuations or more). This special figure 2 hit (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d7 was missed (including small hits) in the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol was 5 times or more after the big hit was completed and the special symbol was drawn. This is a data table in which the type of fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected in the case is specified. As shown in FIG. 16B, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is a long fluctuation of 300 seconds, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Be selected.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the state where the number of times of executing the variable display of the special symbol is 4 times or less after the big hit, the lottery result is missed (small hit). Regardless of whether it is a big hit or a big hit, the fluctuation time is always set to 1 second. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot is E or F from the fluctuation time during the execution of the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the jackpot. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the fluctuation time whether or not the gaming state after all the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is completed is the probability variation mode. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether or not the probabilistic mode is set can be made to pay more attention to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect and play the game, so that the motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the number of executions of the variation display of the special symbol is 5 times or more after the big hit, the fluctuation time is set regardless of the lottery result. The configuration is such that 300 seconds is always set. As a result, if a right-handed player is hit in a state other than during the jackpot, the special symbol lottery is executed only once every 300 seconds (5 minutes) at the shortest (extremely inefficient game). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from making a right-handed hit in a state other than during the jackpot. If a right-handed hit is made in a state other than the jackpot, especially in the probability variation mode, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, if the jackpot is hit, either the jackpot E or F, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is very likely that it will be. In other words, there is a high possibility that the prize ball will hardly be won and the jackpot will fall into the normal mode after the jackpot. For this reason, the player may be dissatisfied with the game because the normal mode is disadvantageous without being able to fully enjoy the game in the advantageous probability change mode.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, since the game efficiency is deteriorated when the right-handed hit is performed in a state other than the jackpot, it is possible to prevent the player from making a right-handed hit in a state other than the jackpot. Therefore, the game in the probabilistic mode can be more enjoyed.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability time (normal symbol It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently (see FIG. 14 (b)). By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 14 (b), there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the values are "5 to 28". As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is within the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second) A symbol of "○" is lit and displayed as a symbol), and the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is released. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 64a is opened "1 second x 3 times". Will be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 64a is shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a is released only "1 second x 3 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time and the opening time The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). At the same time, the update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and an I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 35) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (a). FIG. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, at least the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, the second random number table 202c, and the variation pattern selection table 202d are stored as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data. ing.

The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 13 (b)), and it is determined that the first special symbol is out of alignment. “4 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be determined (see 202a2 in FIG. 13B). Further, "3 to 40" is defined as a range of judgment values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 13B), and the judgment value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. The range is defined as "41-299" (see 202a3 in FIG. 13B). Further, in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol, "0 to 39" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a4 in FIG. 13B), and the first special symbol is out of alignment. “40 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be determined (see 202a5 in FIG. 13B). Further, "40" is defined as a determination value for determining that the second special symbol is out of alignment (see 202a5 in FIG. 13B), and "41-399" is determined as a small hit for the second special symbol. "(See 202a6 in FIG. 13 (b)). When the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpot defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B). , It is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14A) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2. The value is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 14A, "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9". (See 202b1 in FIG. 14 (a)). This "big hit A" is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are counter values that become "big hit A", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit A" is opened in each round of big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 elapses for 30 seconds or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, if the player keeps hitting right in each round, it is almost certain that the maximum number (7) of balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have passed. , You can get a lot of prize balls when you reach the jackpot A. Further, in one round in which the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) can pass, if the player continues to hit right, the ball will almost certainly pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, after the end of "big hit A", the probability change mode is almost certainly entered. As described above, "big hit A" has the largest number of rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability variation mode, so that it is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

A "big hit B" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 89" (see 202b2 in FIG. 14A). .. This "big hit B" is a big hit with 5 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 80 counter values are "big hit B", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 80% (80/100). Like the "big hit A", this "big hit B" is opened until the opening / closing door 65f1 elapses for 30 seconds or until seven balls win in each round of the big hit. Therefore, as with the jackpot A, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Further, in the first round of the jackpot, the ball almost certainly passes through the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change mode is almost certainly entered after the end of the "big hit B". In this way, since "big hit B" has fewer rounds than "big hit A" (and "big hit D" described later), the number of prize balls that can be obtained is smaller than that of "big hit A" (and "big hit D"). However, many prize balls can be paid out. Further, since the game state after the big hit is in the probability change mode, the game state shifts to the game state which is advantageous for the player after the big hit, as in the case of "big hit A".

A "big hit C" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 14A). .. This "big hit C" is a big hit with two rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are counter values that become "big hit C", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). Similar to "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", this "big hit C" is opened until the opening / closing door 65f1 elapses for 30 seconds or seven balls are won in each round of the big hit. Therefore, as with "big hit A" and "big hit B", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Further, in the first round of the jackpot, the ball almost certainly passes through the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change mode is almost certainly entered after the end of the "big hit C". As described above, since the number of rounds of the "big hit C" is the smallest, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is small, but the prize balls can be paid out, so that the player can increase the number of balls held by the player. In addition, since the game state after the big hit is in the probability change mode, the game state shifts to an advantageous game state for the player after the big hit, as in the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In this way, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, the prize balls for 2 to 16 rounds can be paid out, and the game state after the big hit will almost certainly be in the probability change mode. Whichever jackpot type is used, it is advantageous for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14A, "big hit D" is associated with the second special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0-4". (See 202b4 in FIG. 14 (a)). This "big hit D" is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, five counter values are "big hit D", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100). Since this "big hit D" has the same operation as the "big hit A", it is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player like the "big hit A".

A "big hit E" is associated with the second special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5-49" (see 202b5 in FIG. 14A). .. This "big hit E" is a big hit with 7 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 45 counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 45% (45/100). This "big hit E" is opened until the opening / closing door 65f1 elapses for 0.2 seconds or until seven balls win in each round of the big hit. Therefore, it is difficult to even get one ball into the specific winning opening 65a in each round, so that almost no prize ball can be obtained. Further, since it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a in the first round, there is almost no possibility that the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow path 65e2 in the first round. Therefore, the gaming state after the end of the "big hit E" is a "normal mode" that is almost disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, the "big hit E" is a type of big hit that is disadvantageous to the player because the prize ball is hardly obtained and there is an extremely high possibility that the mode shifts to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after the big hit.

With respect to the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "big hit F" (see 202b6 in FIG. 14A). .. This "big hit F" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit F", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit F" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). Like the "big hit E", this "big hit F" is opened until the opening / closing door 65f1 elapses for 0.2 seconds or until seven balls win in each round of the big hit. Therefore, as with the "big hit E", the prize ball is hardly obtained, and there is an extremely high possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after the big hit, which is a disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

In this way, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a high probability (95% ratio) that the prize ball can hardly be obtained, and the game state after the big hit is almost certainly in the normal mode. , F, so there is a high possibility that it will be disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that all the reserved balls of the second special symbol, which are increased by the ball entering the second entrance 640 during the big hit, will be removed. It is possible to provide a novel playability.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14B) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 14 (b)). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as a determination value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 14 (b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to. , It is judged whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol.

The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a second. Special symbol hold ball number counter 203e, normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, remaining ball timer flag 203k, remaining ball timer 203m, probability change effective flag 203n , Probability variation effective timer 203o, discharge number counter 203p, fluctuation time counter 203q, big hit medium flag 203r, small hit medium flag 203s, round end flag 203t, and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type. Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are set to the execution area ( It is shifted (moved) to (see FIG. 17), and a determination such as a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the second entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding first area). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that it is the same as in the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the 2nd special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays fluctuations (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 28).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 28, FIG. 30). See S405). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variation held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 28). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls at the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 32).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held M in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703: No in FIG. 33). ).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state (probability variation mode) of the special symbol. If the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state (probability variation mode) of the special symbol. ), And if the probability variation flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (normal mode) of the special symbol. Further, as described above, in the probability variation mode, the time saving state of the normal symbol is obtained. Therefore, when the probability variation flag 203g is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

The initial value of the probability variation flag 203g is set to off, and when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it is set to on at the end of the jackpot (see S1302 in FIG. 39). Further, the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off when the jackpot game is started (see S219 in FIG. 28).

The probability variation flag 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start processing (see S302 in FIG. 29). Specifically, when the special symbol change start process (FIG. 29, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29, S213), the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if it is on, the probability variation is performed while the special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. If the flag 203g is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

Further, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 32). Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203g is referred to in the ordinary symbol variation processing and the probability variation flag 203g is on, the ordinary symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table 202c for high probability. On the other hand (see S609 in FIG. 32), if the probability variation flag 203g is off, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 32). Further, in the normal symbol variation processing, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a when the normal symbol hits (S614, FIG. 32). See S620).

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the probabilistic switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Here, when the sphere passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1416 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S1304 in FIG. 39). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

When the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed, the probability change setting flag is set. 203h may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such that only the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on and the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. it can.

The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in the present embodiment, one round of the jackpot). It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203p described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1415 in FIG. 40). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1511 in FIG. 41). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the ball is added and updated one by one (S1403 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (the total value of the discharge number counter 203p and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 41). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball brushing period after one round is completed and the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, it means that it is a ball brushing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203m, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1505 in FIG. 41). The remaining ball timer 203m is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the balls in the variable winning device 65 to be ejected has elapsed. It is a counter.

The remaining ball timer 203m is the time required for the game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer. It is set as an upper limit value of 203 m. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203m (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejections thereof match. (S1507 in FIG. 41). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65. Further, it is possible to illegally leave the ball in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of causing the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 at the timing of the first round of the jackpot E and the jackpot F.

If the number of prizes and the number of discharges do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if that flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The probability change effective flag 203n is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the sphere passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change effective flag 203n is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is the probability change switch based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the sphere to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability change effective timer 203o is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203n is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203o, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability change effective timer 203o is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, after the switching member 65h closes the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, or the piano from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a game ball with a line or the like to pass it, or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203p is reset to an initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharges (S1511 in FIG. 41).

The fluctuation time counter 203q is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. In the fluctuation time counter 203q, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is set (see S311 in FIG. 29). Further, the fluctuation time counter 203q is subtracted by 1 in the special symbol fluctuation processing (see FIG. 28) (see S214 in FIG. 28), and whether the fluctuation time has elapsed based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q. It is determined.

The jackpot middle flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203r is on, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203r becomes a jackpot by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to on when the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1103 in FIG. 37). Further, it is set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 39). In the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28), the jackpot hit flag 203r is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is hit (see S201 in FIG. 28).

The small hit medium flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag 203s is on, it means that the small hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the small hit is not in progress. The small hit medium flag 203r becomes a small hit by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to on as soon as the small hit is started (see S1603 in FIG. 42). It is also set to off at the end of the small hit (see S1610 in FIG. 42). In the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28), the small hit middle flag 203s is referred to to determine whether or not the small hit is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 28).

The round end flag 203t is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball-brushing period after the jackpot round is completed. When the round end flag 203t is on, it indicates that the ball brushing period is after the end of the round, and when it is off, it indicates that the ball brushing period has ended.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags. By performing control with reference to these flags and counters, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is played in the hope that the reserved ball of the second special symbol will be disengaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203. explain. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a method of shifting the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is roughly classified into three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, the door breakthrough mode shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, and the probability variation mode shown in the lower part of FIG. 19 are provided.

As described above, the normal mode indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, because the probability of becoming a big hit is low and it is difficult for the ball to enter the first entry port 64. This is the most unfavorable playing state for the player. Further, as described above, the probability variation mode indicates the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, the jackpot probability is high, and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. It is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, the door breakthrough mode indicates a state in which the reserved balls of the second special symbol acquired during the execution of the probabilistic jackpot (big hits A to D) exist, and all the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol is removed. If this is the case, it is a state indicating that the game can be played in an advantageous probability variation mode. This door breakthrough mode is the same as the probability variation mode except that the holding ball of the second special symbol exists. That is, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is high (1/10), and the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The rate at which all the reserved balls of the four second special symbols accumulated during the jackpot are removed is about 65.6% (9/10 to the 4th power), so the door breakthrough mode has a rate of 65.6%. It can be said that the probabilistic mode can be expected.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, it becomes a big hit (big hits A to C) of the first special symbol, and if the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round, it shifts to the door breakthrough mode after the big hit ends. .. As described above, in the jackpots A to C, the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 by simply hitting right in one round. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (V prize is not won) due to the player not launching the ball, the game state after the big hit is set to the normal mode again. Will be done.

As shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, the mode shifts from the door breakthrough mode to another mode not only when a big hit is made, but also when all the fluctuation displays based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol are completed. That is, as shown in FIG. 19, when the variation display based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols is completed in the door breakthrough mode, the mode shifts to the probability variation mode.

In addition, when the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 5% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, so that the door breakthrough mode is performed again after the jackpot. Move to. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (V prize is not won) in the first round due to the player not launching the ball, the game state after the big hit is set to the normal mode. .. On the other hand, if either the jackpot E or the jackpot F, which is determined at the rate of 95% of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball is sent to the specific winning opening 65a in the first round. Since it is difficult to enter the ball, the ball hardly passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19, after the jackpots E and F are completed, the mode shifts to the normal mode.

As shown at the bottom of FIG. 19, the probabilistic mode is switched to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, a big hit (big hits A to C) is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, and if the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round, the door breakthrough mode is entered after the big hit is completed. Transition. Since the jackpots A to C are all jackpot types that allow the ball to easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the mode is almost shifted to the door breakthrough mode after the jackpot ends. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (V prize is not won) in the first round due to the player not launching the ball, the game state after the big hit is set to the normal mode. ..

In this way, in the first embodiment, by going back and forth between the three modes, the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is completely removed. , It is possible to realize a characteristic playability that the game can be played in an advantageous probability variation mode. In a general pachinko machine, it is a preferable event for a player to win a big hit again in the hold after the end of the big hit (so-called consecutive villas in the hold), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the hit is in the hold. It is possible to give the player an advantage in the hope that no consecutive villas will occur. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a novel game property different from that of a general pachinko machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is used to open and close the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing door 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) is shown. ) To determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (b). FIG. 20B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a dependent fluctuation time counter. At least 223f, a breakthrough effect counter 223g, a game state storage area 223h, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area consisting of one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. There is. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting number) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times, and is a second special. The symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and counts the number of reserved balls counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter. In 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is indicated. The ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command of the main control device 110 from the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4208 in FIG. 46). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c after storage, the display hold ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send to.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value is changed while synchronizing with 203e. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. Can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4802 in FIG. 52). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4807 in FIG. 52). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The slave fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. When the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the slave fluctuation time counter 223f.

The breakthrough effect counter 223g is a counter indicating the number of remaining doors to be breached before shifting to the probability variation mode in the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Based on the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223 g, it is determined whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is completed.

The game state storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. The game state storage area 223h is updated every time a state command output is received from the main control device 110 every time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed (see S4210 in FIG. 46). The game state storage area 223h is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, it indicates whether or not the lowest bit is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and indicates whether or not the lower second bit is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Therefore, in the "normal mode", the lower 2 bits are "00B", while in the "door breakthrough mode" and the "probability variation mode", the lower 2 bits are "11B". The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, a time-lapse timer that measures the effect time, and the like. doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 53) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 55 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 53).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 22, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 22 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 22 (b). As shown in FIG. 22, on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, the image of the fluctuation when the power is turned on with the “○” symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and the “○” as shown in FIG. 22 (c). At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 22 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected at the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 22 (c) are alternated. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been reliably performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 23B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 23, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 sets the range between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sandy beach stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sandy beach stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23B, the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b (or the image between FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b)) including the initial position is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. It can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left in a smooth connection.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 7) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "adventurer" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is displayed by being resident in the character symbol area 235e. When the control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead reads the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, and the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance in the image controller 237, a predetermined image can be drawn. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays either back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or a back different from back A and B. It contains information that identifies whether to display the image. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from the backs A and B, the back type also describes information for specifying which back image to display.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surface A and B as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the back type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 24). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 25). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 25).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, in the example of FIG. 25). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 53) (see S6005 in FIG. 53). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 64 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 55 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 55B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 55 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 64 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 55 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 61) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 26) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 26, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 55 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 61). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 65). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 65). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 66).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 55B) is executed every time the drawing process is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 43. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the big hit or the small hit (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the big hit medium flag 203r and the small hit medium flag 203s is on. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S201, when it is determined that neither the special symbol is a big hit nor a small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number of holdings of variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2) is acquired. (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S211 (S207), the data stored in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. The data is shifted and the process shifts to S213.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (of the first special symbol). The number of holdings N1) of the variation display based on the lottery is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209).

If it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the number of the first special symbol reserved balls is The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223b.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S209), and the process is transferred to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213), and ends this process. The details of this special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q is updated by subtracting 1 (S214), and the updated fluctuation time counter. Based on the value of 203q, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q updated in the process of S214 becomes 0. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S215: No) has not elapsed, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 29. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A to F is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached, the red LED is turned on. , The green LED is turned on, and when the jackpot is D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S218). If the result of this lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to off (S219), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. To do. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S219, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed, it branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S218, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S218: No), the processing of S219 and S220 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S221.

The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol is determined. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, the probability variation flag 203g is read out to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not the probability variation state). When it is determined in the processing of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol for high probability. Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13B). As described above, 40 random numbers of "0 to 39" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values of these hits. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probabilistic state of the special symbol (it is in the low probability state of the special symbol) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 Based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 13B), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the hit random number value (that is, "0 to 39"), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14A) to determine what the jackpot type is. To do. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0-9", it is a big hit A (16 round probability variation big hit). Judging, if it is in the range of "10-89", it is judged that it is a jackpot B (5-round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "90-99", it is a jackpot C (2-round probability variation jackpot). Judgment (see FIG. 14 (a)). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0-4", it is determined that it is a big hit D (16 round probability variation big hit). If it is in the range of "5 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot E (7 rounds normal jackpot), and "50 to 99" is performed (see FIG. 14 (a)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to F). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A to F) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 (see FIG. 13A). Fluctuation time) is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of place (including a small hit) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of offset is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is compared. Time) is decided.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, the counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern this time is set in the fluctuation time counter 223q (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 36). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640. , This is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various counters when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N1) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has won a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223b.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set in the RAM 203. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406), and the process shifts to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640 (S407). In this process as well, as in the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over the three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entry port 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is If it is determined that the value is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S411, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is changed. The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. In the processing of S412, as in the processing of S406, the value of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S413, a pre-reading process for pre-reading whether or not the result is obtained from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S413), and this process is terminated. The details of this look-ahead processing will be described with reference to FIG. 31.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S413). In this look-ahead processing (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected for the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 in the starting winning process (see FIG. 30). If (S501) does not detect a new ball entry (S501: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a new ball has been detected in the process of S501 (S501: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit value (that is, 4). Whether or not it is determined (S502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S502 that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), whether or not the timing of starting the variation display based on the incoming ball is the probable change state of the special symbol. (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the game is in the probable change state according to the current gaming state and the look-ahead result of the reserved ball held before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the reserved ball does not include a jackpot, the current game state and the timing of starting the variation display based on the ball input detected this time match, so that the current game state is a probable change state. It is determined that. In addition, if a jackpot is included in the reserved ball, the game state may be changed according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, if the probabilistic jackpot is withheld, it shifts to the probabilistic state after the jackpot, and if the normal jackpot is withheld, it shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variation display based on the ball input detected this time is in the probabilistic state.

In the processing of S503, if it is determined that the start time of the fluctuation based on the ball entry detected this time is the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the ball entry port that detected the ball entry and the high probability time. Based on the first random number table for, the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S504), and the process is shifted to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of fluctuation is in the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), it is based on the type of the entry port where the entry is detected and the first random number table for the low probability. Then, the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S505), and the process is shifted to S506.

In the process of S506 executed after the process of S504 or S505, the winning information command is set based on the type of the ball entry port that detected the current ball entry and the lottery result acquired in the process of S504 or S505. (S506), this process is terminated. The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the type of the winning ball notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the 64.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entry port 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S608). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the period in which the special symbol is in the probable change state and the period in which the normal symbol is in the time-saving state coincide with each other. Therefore, in the process of S608, if the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on, it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is on, and if it is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

In the processing of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S608: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 and the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability Based on this, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 14 (b)).

In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S610. In the processing of S610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of 0 to 4,29 to 239, it is normal. It is determined that the design is out of alignment (see FIG. 14B).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611: Yes), The display mode at the time of hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the time saving state of the normal symbol (whether the probability variation flag 203g is on) (S614), and if it is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: Yes), the variation display on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the probability variation flag 203g is off) (S614: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (that is, the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds. S616), this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S617). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S615 or the process of S616 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S617 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 62) is executed next, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S619). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (that is, whether the probability variation flag 203g is on) (S620), and the time saving state is determined. If it is not (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S621), and the process is performed. It shifts to S523. On the other hand, in the processing of S620, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entry port 64 are set to "1 second x". Set to "twice" (S622), and the process shifts to S623.

In the process of S623, the opening time determined in the process of S621 or S622 and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening are set (S623), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed next, the electric accessory 64a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S621 or the process of S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S914 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S914 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1015 in FIG. 36, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S914). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S915, S916) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S915, S916) of the RAM 203 is executed. .. In the RAM initialization process (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the processing of S916 is completed, the processing is shifted to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the processing of S910 is completed, the probability change flag 203g is read (S911), and the state command is set based on the state of the read probability change flag 203g. This state command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the current gaming state. After the processing of S912 is completed, interrupts are permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1009 and S1010 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) and the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of jackpots, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won a prize. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

When the process of S1004 is completed, next, in the case of a small hit state, a small hit control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1005). In the small hit control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened at the start of the small hit, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed during the opening period of the small hit or whether a predetermined number of balls have won a prize. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this small hit control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

When the process of S1005 is completed, next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entry port 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device is used when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) ends. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display at. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010: No), the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1009, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 34 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see S901 in FIG. 35). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the specific winning opening 65a is executed. Is a process for opening or closing.

In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S220 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command for notifying the start of the opening period of the jackpot is set (S1102). The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect. After the processing of S1102, the jackpot middle flag 203r is set to ON (S1103), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot of the special symbol (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1104). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1004, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1104: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1104, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105), and if it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes). ), The jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107). Specifically, when the special game state (all rounds of the jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: Yes), the ending command is set (S1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1109). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: Yes), then the jackpot end process for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S1110), and this process is terminated. To do. The details of this jackpot end processing (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the big hit (special game state) (S1109: No), the winning process for performing the processing according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1111). .. The details of this winning process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. After the winning process (S1111) is completed, an abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is normally discharged is executed (S1112), and this process is terminated. The details of this abnormality processing (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1106). This jackpot operation setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) is started, first, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1201), and then it is determined whether it is the start timing of one round (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S1202: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1203), and the process shifts to S1204. On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, if it is determined that this round is not the first round, the processing of S1203 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1204. In the process of S1204, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204), and this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 (see S4404 in FIG. 48). As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the special discharge flow path 65e2 can be set to pass through in the first round. it can. As a result, in the jackpots A to D, the ball almost certainly passes through the probability change switch 65e3 just by the player hitting the right in the first round, so that the probability change mode (probability change state of the special symbol and the probability change state of the special symbol) is completed after the jackpot ends. , It is possible to shift to the normal symbol time saving state). Also, in the case of jackpots E and F, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON in the first round, but as described above, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 is extremely short (0.2 seconds). Since it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during one round, the possibility that the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 is almost zero. Therefore, when the jackpot is either E or F, the normal mode can be set after the jackpot ends. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol in which one of the types of jackpots A to C is determined in the case of a jackpot is regarded as a lottery advantageous for the player, and a high probability (95%) in the case of a jackpot. The lottery of the second special symbol in which either the jackpot E or F is determined by the ratio) can be a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S1110). This jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end process (S1110), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1301: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so the probability variation flag 203g should be set to on. Set the state after the big hit to the probability change mode (S1302), and shift to the processing of S1303. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1303. Since the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off at the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 28), by skipping the process of S1302, the probability variation flag 203g is turned off after the jackpot. That is, after the jackpot ends, the normal mode is set.

In the process of S1303, a state command is set based on the state of the probability change flag 203g (S1303). The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the game state storage area 223h according to the game state notified by the state command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot middle flag 203r and the probability variation setting flag 203h are set to off (S1304), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 39), the game state after the jackpot ends can be accurately set according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In this winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is valid (S1401). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S1401, if the round validity period is not (S1401: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1401, when it is determined that the current round validity period is (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1402), and the specific winning opening 65a is determined. If winning is detected (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j to update (S1403), and a winning command indicating that winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected is set. (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the processing of S1403 and S1404 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1405.

In the process of S1405, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405), and if the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the processing of S1405, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406), and if the round time has elapsed, it is determined. (S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. In the processing of S1406, when the jackpots A to D are jackpots A to D, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the round, and in the case of jackpots E and F, the start of the round is started. When 0.2 seconds have passed since then, it is determined that the round time has passed.

In the process of S1407, the closure of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and the closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the closure of the specific winning opening 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S1409), and if it is determined that the closure is based on the end of one round (S1409: Yes), the flow path solenoid (Probability change solenoid) 65k is set to off (S1410), and the process shifts to S1411. On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is due to the completion of a round other than the first round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is turned on. Since it is not set to, the process of S1410 is skipped and the process is transferred to S1411.

In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the probability variation effective flag 203n, and the round end flag 203t are set to ON (S1411), and the process shifts to S1412. Further, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 6 or less in the processing of S1405 (S1405: No), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the processing of S1406 (S1406: No), S1407. The process of ~ S1411 is skipped, and the process shifts to S1412.

In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag 203t is on (S1412), and if the round end flag 203t is off (S1412: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1413. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1412 that the round end flag 203t is on (S1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203n is on (S1416). In the process of S1416, if the probability variation valid flag 203n is off (S1416: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probabilistic valid flag 203n is on (S1416: No), 1 is added to the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203o (S1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203o is the upper limit value (S1416: No). S1418). Then, if the value of the probability change effective timer 203o is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1413, and the process of monitoring the probability change switch 65e3 and updating the probability change setting flag 203h is executed. As a result, if the probability change effective timer 203o is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 65e3 from being improperly passed through the ball and being given the probability change state.

On the other hand, if the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203o is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203n and the round end flag 203t are set to off (S1419), and the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203o is reset (S1420). ), End this process.

Further, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1413), and if the sphere has not passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1413: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1414. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203i (S1414), the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1413), and this process is performed. To finish.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormal processing (S1112) is a processing executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is normally discharged. It is a process for.

In the abnormal processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is (S1501), and if it is not the round valid period (S1501: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1502).

In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203p (S1503), and the process proceeds to the process of S1504. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the ball does not pass through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203k is off (S1504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504: Yes), the ball is being brushed, so 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203m to update (S1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then the number of discharges (the total value of the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203p) is won. It is determined whether or not the number (value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

If it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to the process of S1509. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of illegally entering the ball into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and passing it through the probability change switch 54e3.

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to off (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is reset (S1510). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203p, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S1511), and this process is terminated.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 41), a problem may occur in which the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is not normally discharged due to a ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. It can be detected and notified at an early stage.

Next, the details of the small hit control process (S1005) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. As described above, this small hit control process is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the small hit state.

In this small hit control process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (S1601), and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit (S1601: Yes), the small hit is small. An opening command indicating a winning opening is set (S1602), a small hit medium flag 203s is set to ON (S1603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S1601: No), then it is determined whether the small hit is in progress (S1604), and when it is determined that the small hit is not in progress (S1604). : No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1604, when it is determined that a small hit is in progress (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a based on the small hit (S1604: Yes). In S1605), if it is the start timing of the opening operation (S1605: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (opening of the opening / closing door 65f1) is set (S1606), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the opening operation (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607), and if it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607: No). Yes), an ending command indicating that the ending period of the small hit has started is set (S1608), and this process ends.

Further, in the processing of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1607: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the small hit (S1609), and if it is the end timing of the small hit. (S1609: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203s is set to off (S1610), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1609, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), the small hit middle prize process for determining the end of the small hit opening period is executed (S1611). The details of the small hit medium winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

When the small hit middle winning process (S1611) is completed, an abnormal process for determining the match between the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 65a and the number of ejected balls is executed (S1612), and this process is completed. To do. Since this abnormal processing (S1612) is the same processing as the abnormal processing (see FIG. 41) executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37), the details thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the small hit middle winning process (S1611) for determining the end of the small hit opening period will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the small hit medium winning process (S1611). In the small hit middle prize processing (S1611), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is in the round valid period (S1701), and if it is determined that it is out of the round valid period (S1701: No), the book is as it is. End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1701, when it is determined that the round validity period is valid (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning of the ball into the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1702), and the winning of the ball is detected. If it is determined that the result has been achieved (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is not detected in the processing of S1702 (S1702: No), the processing of S1703 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1704.

In the processing of S1704, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704), if it is less than 7 (S1704: No), then the round time (0.2 seconds) elapses. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1705). If it is determined in the process of S1705 that the round time has not elapsed (S1705: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the opening period of the small hit. On the other hand, in the processing of S1704, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is a value of 7 or more (S1704: Yes), and when it is determined that the round time has elapsed in the processing of S1705 (S1705: Yes). Since it means that the end condition of the opening period of the small hit is satisfied, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1706), and this process is terminated.

In addition, since it is almost impossible to make seven or more balls win the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds, which is the round time of the small hit, it is almost impossible to make a small hit. After the winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds, the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 52, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S4116 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") (see FIG. 45). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 45), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4116. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1616 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is judged to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to the process of S4008. ..

If the power-off processing flag is on in the processing of S4002 (S4002: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure and during the execution of the power-off processing of S4116. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, since the control cannot be continued in such a case, the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

In the process of S4005, if the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4005: Yes). S4006), the process shifts to S4008. By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

On the other hand, in the process of S4005, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. .. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4115 of FIG. 45). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

After the processing of S4010, the notification content of the state command set in the startup processing (see FIG. 31) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is analyzed (S4011), and the game state storage area 223h is analyzed according to the analysis result. Data is updated (S4012). As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time the power is turned on. After the processing of S4012, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4008 is performed via the processing of S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process of S4009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process of S401 to S4013 is executed, and the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached via the processing of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S4102 to S4110 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). Therefore, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the process of S4102 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4101: Yes). S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S4107 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S4110 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S4111. In the process of S4111, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4111). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the processing of S4113 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S4115) to turn off the power. The process is executed (S4116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S4201). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4201 (S4201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4202), and the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the received fluctuation pattern command. Is extracted (S4203), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4204). Then, when the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4207). .. Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (Number of holdings of variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) or the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e (number of holdings of variable display based on the second special symbol N2) is extracted and this Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4208). Further, in the process of S1708, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c is set. .. After the processing of S4208 is completed, this processing is completed.

Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by S08. The value of the symbol reserved ball counter 223c can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are the first special symbol holding ball number counters of the main control device 110. Even if the values deviate from the values of 203d and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e, the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 are used when the start winning prize is detected or the special symbol is drawn. The value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223c can be modified to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S4208 is executed, the display holding balls for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c. A few commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4207, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not the state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). Then, when it is determined that the state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223h is updated according to the received command (S4210). That is, when the probability change mode is notified based on the information corresponding to the game state (whether or not it is the probability change state) notified by the state command, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223h are set to "11B". On the other hand, when the normal mode is notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223h are set to "00B". As a result, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, in the process of S4209, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S4211). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4211 (S4211: Yes), the winning information command processing for controlling according to the pre-reading result of the new start winning notified by the winning information command is executed. Then (S4212), this process is terminated. Details of this winning information command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then whether or not a command related to the jackpot (opening command, round number command, or ending command) has been received. (S4213). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has been received (S4213: Yes), the jackpot-related processing for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S4214). This process ends. Details of this jackpot-related process (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S4213: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4215), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4215, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the above-mentioned winning information command processing (S4212) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the winning information command processing (S4212).

In the winning information command processing (see FIG. 47), first, the information notified by the received winning command (information indicating the type of the entrance to which a new start winning is detected and the lottery result) is input to the winning information storage area 223a. It is stored in the corresponding storage area of (S4301). When the processing of S4301 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the prize information of the second special symbol is notified by the prize information command this time (S4302). In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the notification this time is not the prize information of the second special symbol (the prize information of the first special symbol) (S4302: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information this time is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpots A to D are currently being executed (S4303), and the jackpot is hit. If it is determined that any of A to D is being executed (S4303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is in the ending period (S4304), and if it is not in the ending period, the adventurer 811 Selects the aspect of the key 813 in the effect of finding the key 813 (see FIG. 8B) (S4305). In the processing of S4305, if the winning information this time is the winning information corresponding to the lottery result of the loss (small hit), the ratio of selecting the key 813 in the luxurious mode is high, and the winning information this time is the big hit E, F. If the winning information corresponds to, the ratio of selecting the key 813 in a poor (tattered) mode is high. When the process of S4305 is completed, an effect of finding the key 813 of the mode selected in the process of S4305 is set (S4306), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4303, when it is determined that the jackpots A to D are not being executed (S4303: No), and in the processing of S4304, when it is determined that the ending period of the jackpots A to D is in progress (S4304: Yes). , As a result of hitting right during the period when the player should hit left, it means that a starting prize for the second entrance 640 was detected, so it is a game to stop right hit and return to left hit. A warning effect for notifying a person is executed (S4307), and this process is terminated. This warning effect (not shown) is stronger for the player than the image of the character "left-handed" and the left-pointing arrow displayed for the display area HR1 during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. The effect of the mode of instructing is executed. Specifically, for example, the characters "left-handed" are displayed in large size on the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the voice "Please return to left-handed" is repeatedly played at the maximum volume. Will be done. By executing this warning effect, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from hitting the right side in a situation other than the execution of the jackpots A to D. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuously performing a right-handed strike during the normal mode or the probability variation mode, and the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is continuously executed.

By executing this winning information command processing, the mode of the key 813 found during the jackpot can be appropriately set based on the new winning information of the second special symbol. Therefore, during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the player can predict the degree of expectation of the probability variation mode based on the mode of the key 813, so that the player's game during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. It is possible to improve the interest in the door.

In the first embodiment, the selection ratio of the mode of the key 813 can be changed depending on whether or not the winning information of the second special symbol newly notified by the winning information command is out of order (small hit). However, as a configuration for selecting the mode of the key 813 based on not only the winning information based on the new winning information command but also the winning information of the second special symbol already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. May be good. Specifically, for example, before receiving the current prize information command, the prize information corresponding to either the jackpot E or F is included in the prize information already stored in the prize information storage area 223a. If it is included, the ratio of selecting the key 813 in a poor mode may be high regardless of the lottery result of the winning information this time. With this configuration, the more the keys 813 in the poor mode are continuous, the higher the possibility that the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol, so that the player can play. It is possible to more accurately estimate whether or not the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved ball. Further, for example, when all of the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a before receiving the current prize information command and the current prize information command is out (small hit), the selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to provide an aspect (for example, an aspect of a diamond key 813) in which With such a configuration, when the aspect is displayed, the expectation for shifting to the probabilistic mode can be further increased.

In the first embodiment, when the winning information command corresponding to the second entrance 640 is received outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the warning effect is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. Even if a new ball is detected in the second entrance 640 when the reserved ball of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit, a warning effect is executed if it is outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D. It may be configured. In particular, during the ending of the jackpots A to D and during the execution of the first variation display, it is highly possible that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit value. In such a case, if the player is hitting right, a new start prize may be generated for the second entrance 640, so that the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed five times or more after the big hit. There is a possibility that the player may lose money. On the other hand, when a ball entering the second entrance 640 is detected outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the player loses by setting a warning effect. Can be suppressed (prevented).

Next, the jackpot-related processing (S4214) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this jackpot related process (S4214).

In the jackpot-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S4401), and if the opening command has been received (S4401: Yes), the display opening command is set (S4402). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. When the processing of S4402 is completed, the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 48) is completed. If the opening command this time is a command corresponding to the opening of either big hit E, F, or small hit, and the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed, the door breakthrough mode is executed. The production continues as it is. In this case, the opening command itself may not be output to the display control device 114, or the display control device 114 determines whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed, and selects the effect mode. It may be configured to be used.

On the other hand, in the process of S4401, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4403). Then, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4403: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S4404), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number. (S4405). The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S4405, this processing is terminated. As in the case of receiving the opening command, if the start timing of a new round of jackpots E and F is reached during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the door breakthrough mode effect is continued as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not the closure command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4406). Then, when it is determined that the closing command has been received (S4406: Yes), the closing command processing for performing control according to the situation in which the closing command has been received is executed (S4406), and this processing is terminated. The details of this closing command processing (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

In the process of S4405, if it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S4405: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4407). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4407: Yes), the ending command process for performing control according to the type and situation of the ending command is executed (S4408), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4407: No), this process ends as it is. By executing this jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the jackpot.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned closing command processing (S4406) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. In this closing command processing (S4406), first, it is determined whether the type of the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots A to D (S4501), and when it is determined to be any of the jackpots A to D (S4501). S4501: Yes), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is other than the jackpots A to D (either jackpot E or F) (S4501: No), then the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0. (That is, whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed), and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223 g is 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed). ), This process ends as it is (S4502: No).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4502: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4503). , It is determined whether the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction becomes 0 (that is, whether it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect) (S4504). If it is determined in the process of S4504 that the counter value after subtraction is 1 or more (S4504: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the door breakthrough mode effect. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after subtraction becomes 0 (S4504: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, so that the remaining period until the end of the jackpot is reached. The result display is set (S4505), and this process ends. The result display indicates a display content in which the total number of prize balls paid out by repeating the current jackpot and the probability variation mode, the number of jackpots, and the like are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By setting this result display, the number of jackpots won by the player, the number of prize balls won, and the like can be easily grasped, so that the player can have a sense of accomplishment.

Next, the details of the ending command processing (S4408) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, this ending command processing (S4408) is a processing for performing control according to the jackpot type, the game situation, and the like when the ending command is received.

In this ending command processing, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command indicating the ending of a small hit (S4601), and if it is determined that it is the ending of a small hit (S4601: Yes), the small hit A small hit control process for performing control according to the timing of terminating is executed (S4602), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the ending is not a small hit (S4601: No), the ending command this time is output to notify that the ending organization of the big hit has been started. Therefore, it is determined whether the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots A to D (S4603).

In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is neither of the jackpots A to D (S4603: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots A to D (S4603: Yes), the prize information of the second special symbol is read from the prize information storage area 223a (S4604), and the read prize is won. It is determined whether or not the jackpot D is included in the lottery result of the reserved ball of the second special symbol indicated by the information. As described above, the jackpot D is the only jackpot type of the second special symbol that can obtain a large amount of prize balls and in which the probability variation mode is set after the jackpot.

In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the jackpot D is included in the hold (S4605: Yes), the door breakthrough mode of a special mode in which the jackpot is notified during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect is notified. The effect is set (S4606), and this process ends. As described above, after the jackpots A to D are completed, it is basically advantageous for the player if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed. This is because if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a high probability (95%) that the big hit will be either E or F, which is disadvantageous. However, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a case where the big hit D is advantageous to the player with a low probability (5% ratio). In this case, a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and the door breakthrough mode effect is set again after the big hit, which is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the big hits are E and F. Therefore, in this case, by setting the door breakthrough mode effect of the special notification mode, the player can easily understand that the jackpot D has been achieved.

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the jackpot D is not included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol (S4605: No), 4 is set to the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223 g (S4607). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol (S4608). If it is determined that a jackpot is included in the processing of S4608, it means that either jackpot E or F is set during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the mode shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot ends. Finally, the door breakthrough mode effect of the mode of notifying the fall to the normal mode (the mode of failing to break through the door) is set (S4609), and this process is terminated. The production time of the door breakthrough mode production is set to 5.8 seconds, which is the same production time regardless of whether or not a jackpot is included. During this 5.8 seconds, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are missed (small hits), the period from the start of the ending institution to the end of the small hits based on the fourth reserved ball The period. That is, in order to make it difficult for the player to guess whether or not there is a big hit in the reserved ball from the production time, the production time of the door breakthrough mode production is set to the same time (4.8 seconds) regardless of the result. ..

In the process of S4608, when it is determined that the reserved ball does not include a big hit (S4608: No), a door breakthrough mode effect is set in a mode of finally notifying the transition to the probability variation mode (S4610). ), End this process. By executing this ending command process (see FIG. 50), an appropriate effect mode can be set according to the content of the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the above-mentioned small hit end processing (S4602) will be described. The small hit end processing (S4602) is a process executed when it is determined that the received ending command is the small hit ending command in the ending command processing (see FIG. 50).

As shown in FIG. 51, in the small hit end processing (see FIG. 51), first, whether or not the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0 (that is, whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed). If the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (S4701: No), it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed, and the present process is terminated as it is. A small hit outside the execution period of the door breakthrough mode effect is a case where the player intentionally or negligently hits the right outside the execution period of the big hits A to D (the period during which the left hit should be performed). is there. In this case, when the start winning prize for the second entrance 640 is detected, the warning effect is set by the processing of S4307 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 47), so that the player has already returned to the left-handed strike. It is thought that there is. Therefore, at the end of the small hit, control such as performing a warning effect again is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the repeated warning effect even though the player has returned to the left-handed strike.

In the process of S4701, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (S4701: Yes), then the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4702), and the counter value after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not it has become (S4703). If it is determined in the processing of S4703 that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g becomes 0 (S4703), the door breakthrough mode effect ends with a lottery result of being off (small hit) (that is, all the door breakthrough mode effects are being produced). Since it means that the fluctuation has come off), an effect mode indicating the entry into the probability variation mode is set (S4704), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4703, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is not 0 (1 or more) (S4703: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect. End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4801). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4801: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S4806 is started. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4802), and then S4803 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 46). In the process of, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4803).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4804). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4805), and the processing shifts to S4806. In the process of S4805, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area.

In the process of S4806, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4806). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4806: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is displayed. Finish the setting process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4807), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4808). Next, the display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4808 (S4809), and this process is terminated. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the stop display of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Will be done.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 66. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so that the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after designating the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is followed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 53) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 54, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S6102 and S6102, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 53. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 64 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 64A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 22 is drawn. The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 55 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been reliably performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined in the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 26 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, small hit, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out of order). ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a). FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 56. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (b). FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A to F, small hit, reach out, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55 (b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. Is set to (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is displayed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (a). FIG. 58A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (b). FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a). FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). .. Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to on, and the other bits are set to on. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. ..

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A or B according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, the back side image discrimination flag set by S7002 is used to display the back side image. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 56. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and there is an error command. If (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (b). FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 56. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 57 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 61, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are obtained for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 61. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 61 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (display objects) constituting the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite, Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 64A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 64 (b). FIG. 64 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 55 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) (see S7501: No in FIG. 64 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S7702), and if it is the transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the processing of S7706 that the transfer processing has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S7710), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to obtain the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 55 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the position where the ball is easily entered when the pachinko machine 10 is hit left (a game method in which the ball is launched toward the flow path on the left side of the front view of the game board 13). It is easier for the ball to enter the ball when it is placed in the first ball entrance 64 and right-handed (a game method in which the ball is launched toward the flow path on the right side of the front view of the game board 13). A second ball entry port 640 is provided at a position (which makes it difficult for the ball to enter). If a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it is disadvantageous for the player (in addition to hardly getting a prize ball during the big hit). After the big hit, there is a high possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous normal mode), but if the big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the game It is configured so that there is a high possibility that it will be advantageous to the player (in addition to being able to win a large number of prize balls in the jackpot, the player will shift to an advantageous probability variation mode after the jackpot). As a result, the player can be made to think that he / she wants to execute the lottery of the first special symbol which is advantageous rather than the lottery of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous.

In addition, the flow path on the right side of the front view of the game board 13 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a that is opened during a big hit and a large number (11) of prize balls are paid out each time a ball enters. Similar to the second entry opening 640, the specific winning opening 65a allows the ball to enter when hitting right (easy to enter), and the ball cannot enter when hitting left (difficult to enter). It is provided at the position where Therefore, in order to get a winning ball by winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit, it is necessary to hit the ball to the right. As described above, when the ball is hit to the right, the ball also enters the second entry port 640, so that the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be accumulated up to the upper limit after the big hit. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to form a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous when the jackpot is reached, is continuously executed. The game can be played in the hope that all the reserved balls of the symbol will come off (small hits). That is, in a general pachinko machine, it is a preferable event for the player to win the jackpot again in the hold after the end of the jackpot (so-called consecutive villas in the hold), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, It is possible to give the player an advantage in the hope that the pending villas will not occur. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a novel game property different from that of a general pachinko machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, every time the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases during the execution of the jackpots A to D, the lottery result of the increased reserved balls is pre-read, and the effect of the mode according to the pre-reading result is produced. Is configured to execute. That is, the structure is such that an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result is out of order (small hit) is executed. More specifically, the adventurer 811 acquires the key 813 in the mode corresponding to the pre-reading result of the lottery result of the increased reserved balls. With this effect, the player can be made to guess from the mode of the displayed key 813 whether or not to shift to the probabilistic mode during the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from becoming merely a task for obtaining a prize ball, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the jackpot game.

Further, in the first embodiment, from the ending period of the jackpots A to D to the elapse of the fluctuation time of all the fluctuation displays based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the reserved ball of the second special symbol An effect of notifying the player whether or not there are jackpots E and F in the game is executed. That is, even after all the fluctuation displays based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol are completed, an effect for suggesting whether the game state remains in the probabilistic mode or falls into the normal mode is executed. .. By configuring a series of effects to be executed over the ending period and a plurality of variable displays after the big hit, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, if the lottery of the second special symbol is missed, a small hit is made with a high probability. Then, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 in each round of the big hits E and F are configured to be the same (0.2 seconds). Further, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of the jackpots E and F are completed is set to 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. .. With this configuration, even if any of the 1st to 4th reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode production is completed. The series of opening and closing operations of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the probability change mode is notified (when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are small hits). That is, regardless of whether or not the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 from the end of the jackpot to the end of the door breakthrough mode effect. It is possible to unify the operation of closing for 1 second and opening for 0.2 seconds four times. Therefore, from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 after the end of the big hit, it becomes difficult to determine whether the opening / closing operation is due to the continuous small hits or the opening / closing operation due to the big hits E or F. You can pay attention to the door breakthrough mode production until the end. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specification may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. With this configuration, it is possible to win a big hit by the variable display of the first special symbol before the disadvantageous lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. , You can make the left strike more aggressively. In this case, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 10%). .. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the lottery of the first special symbol one or more times during a long fluctuation of the second special symbol, so that there is a chance of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. Can be formed.

In the first embodiment, the left-handed hit is notified from the start of the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices to notify the player not to continue right-handed after the end of the jackpot. For example, in the final round of the jackpot, the number of remaining balls until the end of the final round is displayed, and "left-handed with the remaining ○ balls" is displayed. By displaying the characters and the like, the player may be configured to switch to the left-handed field immediately after the end condition of the final round is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entry port 640 after the jackpot is completed.

In the first embodiment, when the time is shortened for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is uniformly 3 seconds, and when the normal symbol hits, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a is 1 second ×. The configuration was set to twice, but it is not limited to this. For example, after the jackpot ends, only the fluctuation time of the first normal symbol may be set to a longer time (for example, 10 seconds) than the period until at least all the fluctuations based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol are completed. Good. With this configuration, the normal symbol will not hit during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, so from the opening time of the normal symbol, it will be a big hit in the second special symbol lottery and the normal symbol will be in a low probability state. It can be difficult to determine whether the character has fallen or whether the time saving state of the normal symbol is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to draw more attention to the player as a result of the door breakthrough mode effect.

In the first embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is missed, the hit is almost small, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the second special symbol comes off, instead of configuring it so that it is all just out of place, the fluctuation time in the case of a big hit is changed according to the number of fluctuations after the big hit, and the door breakthrough mode The period from the start of the production to the start of the jackpot of the 2nd special symbol, and the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode production to the end of all the variable displays corresponding to the 4 times of the 2nd special symbol coming off. It may be configured to match the period (the period until the transition to the probabilistic mode). More specifically, if a big hit is made in the first lottery of the second special symbol after the big hit, 4 seconds is set as the fluctuation time, and if the big hit is made in the second lottery of the second special symbol. Is set to 3 seconds as the fluctuation time, and if it becomes a big hit in the 3rd lottery of the 2nd special symbol, 2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time and it becomes a big hit in the 4th lottery of the 2nd special symbol. If this is the case, the fluctuation time may be set to 1 second. With this configuration, the total fluctuation time when all the reserved balls of the four second special symbols are removed is 4 seconds (1 second x 4), and when a big hit is made in the middle, It can be matched with the period (4 seconds) until the jackpot starts. Therefore, during the 4 seconds after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the door breakthrough mode effect, the specific winning opening 65a will not be opened even if the jackpot of the second special symbol is included in the reserved ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that it is known whether or not the operation of the specific winning opening 65a shifts to the probability change mode before the door breakthrough mode effect is completed. In addition, the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode effect to the start of the jackpot of the second special symbol is a variable display corresponding to the four times the second special symbol comes off after the door breakthrough mode effect is started. If the length is longer than the period until all are finished, at least the jackpot will not start during the execution of the door breakthrough mode production. Therefore, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is simply obtained, the fluctuation time may be set to be equal to or greater than the sum of the fluctuation times of the fluctuation display corresponding to the deviation of the second special symbol for four times.

In the first embodiment, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the first to fourth rounds in the jackpots E and F and the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the small hit are the same (0.2 seconds). However, if it is not possible for the player to discern whether the difference is the opening period of the big hit or the opening period of the small hit, it may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous and the lottery of the first special symbol is advantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery of the second special symbol may be advantageous, and the lottery of the first special symbol may be advantageous. Then, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the effect of succeeding in breaking through the door is executed in the door breakthrough mode production, and when all the lottery of the second special symbol is missed, the door breakthrough fails. It may be configured so that the effect to be performed is executed. As a result, if the door is successfully breached, a big hit can be realized, which is easier to understand. Further, in this case, the first ball entry port 64 may be deleted and only the second ball entry port 640 may be provided. That is, it may be configured so that only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

In the first embodiment, it becomes difficult to understand whether the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit while the fluctuation based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the big hit is executed. Although the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a was set as described above, it is not limited to the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol that makes it difficult to understand whether it is a big hit or a small hit. For example, even in the lottery of the first special symbol, the small hit and the big hit type in which the same action as the small hit (the same action or the action indistinguishable from the small hit by the player) is set are determined. Good.

In the first embodiment, the ending period of the jackpot is started to determine whether or not all the reserved balls of the second special symbol held during the jackpot are out (small hit) (shift to the probability variation mode). Therefore, it was configured to be executed over the period until the lottery of all the second special symbols is completed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in at least a part of the case of shifting to the probabilistic mode, the configuration may be such that the transition to the probabilistic mode is notified during the ending period. That is, at the start of the ending period, if the lottery result of the reserved ball of the second special symbol is pre-read and it is determined that all the pre-reading results are out of order (small hit), the probability changes during the ending period of the big hit with a predetermined probability. It may be configured to notify the transition to the mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the transition to the probabilistic mode earlier, so that the player can be pleased. In addition, when notifying the transition to the probabilistic mode during the ending period, an effect of breaking through four doors at once may be executed, or an effect different from the normal door breakthrough mode effect may be executed. May be good. Here, as an effect different from the normal door breakthrough mode effect, for example, an effect in which the theme song of the adventurer 811 is played may be executed, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be blacked out. After that, the effect that the characters "probability change mode confirmed" appear on the display screen may be executed. Further, when an effect for determining the transition to the probabilistic mode is executed during the ending period, the effect is performed until the variation based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is completed (that is, until the probabilistic mode is started). ) It may be a configuration that keeps executing. With this configuration, for a player who knows the transition to the probabilistic mode early (during the ending period), it is possible to shift to the probabilistic mode in the remaining period until the transition to the probabilistic mode. You can immerse yourself in the afterglow. Therefore, the player can be satisfied.

Further, it may be configured to notify the transition to the probabilistic mode before the ending period. More specifically, when the starting prize corresponding to the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected and the prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated based on the prize information command. , It is determined whether all the winning information of the second special symbol is out of order (small hit). Then, when all the winning information is out of order (small hit), an effect indicating the transition to the probabilistic mode may be executed at that time. As an effect indicating the transition to the probabilistic mode, for example, the adventurer 811 may execute an effect of discovering the key 813 in a special (premium) mode. For example, the display mode is normal and a big hit. The music flowing inside may be changed to a special (premium) one.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 84. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided during the jackpot. When the ball passes, the game state after the big hit is set to the probability change mode. Further, as long as the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, the probability change mode and the jackpot are repeated indefinitely.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has a configuration in which the gaming state after the jackpot is predetermined for each type of jackpot. In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive probabilistic change states of the special symbol, and when the upper limit is reached, even if the probabilistic jackpot is won, the probability after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. There is.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, in order to prevent the player from making a right-handed hit in the normal time (a state other than during the jackpot), when the start winning prize for the second entrance 640 is detected in the normal time. It was configured to execute a warning effect.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the electric accessory 640b is provided in the second entry port 640, and the ball normally enters the second entry port 640 while being hindered by the electric accessory 640b. It is configured to be difficult to do. Further, during the jackpot state, by controlling the electric accessory 640b provided attached to the second entry port 640 so as to be easily opened, the second special during the jackpot as in the first embodiment. It is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the symbol can be accumulated up to the maximum number. By providing the electric accessory 640b to be attached to the second entry port 640, the electric accessory 64a provided to be attached to the first entry port 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. ..

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Is a partial change. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 67, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is set in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, on the downstream side of the normal ball entry port 67, a variable winning device 650 and a second ball entry port 640 are provided. The variable winning device 650 is provided in place of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and is used as a winning opening in which 13 winning balls are paid out each time a ball wins in the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650. It is configured. The specific winning opening 650a is configured to be variably configured into an open state in which the ball can enter (easy) and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter (difficult), and is opened in each round of the jackpot. Set to state.

As shown in FIG. 67, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is variably configured into a closed position that prevents the ball from entering the second entry port 640 and an open position that allows the ball to enter, and FIG. 67 shows the open position. The case where it is variable is illustrated. Although the details will be described later, the operation of this electric accessory 640a is controlled so that the ball can easily enter the ball in the low probability state of the normal symbol than in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. Will be. More specifically, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is slightly higher than that of the low probability state of the normal symbol (199/240 → 200/240), but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long. At the same time (3 seconds → 30 seconds), the opening period of the electric accessory 640b when it hits a normal symbol becomes shorter (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 seconds × 1 time). Therefore, it is more difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol as a total. Therefore, in the probability variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, which is disadvantageous for the second special. It is possible to suppress the execution of the symbol lottery. In addition, during the jackpot set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the maximum number during the jackpot. ..

By attaching the electric accessory 640b to the second entry port 640, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entry port 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. A special drawing 1 small hit winning device 655 is provided below the first entry port 64. In this special figure 1 small hit winning device 655, when a small hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 small hit winning opening 655a is set to the open state, so that the ball moves inside. You will be able to enter the ball. In the second embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is greatly increased (1/1000 → 989/1000) in the probabilistic mode, and left-handed is performed during the probabilistic mode. The number of balls consumed in this case is equal to the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the special figure 1 small hit winning opening 655a, which is a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured in. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game efficiency when left-handed in the probability variation mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the distribution member 660 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first embodiment is deleted, and the downstream side of the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is deleted. The flow path of the above is branched in substantially three directions. That is, the flow path toward the second entry port 640, the flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and the out port 66 without going to any of these (second entry port 640, specific winning opening 650a). It is branched into a flow path that flows down toward. With this configuration, as in the first embodiment, a part of the ball launched aiming at the specific winning opening 650a by right-handed during the jackpot can be entered into the second entry opening 640. it can. Therefore, it is possible to configure the structure in which the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the maximum number during the jackpot. As a result, also in the second embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which it is hoped that all the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol executed after the big hit will be missed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, a flow path toward the second entry port 640, a flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and a flow path toward the out port 66 by a plurality of nails. And form. Therefore, by adjusting the nails, the clerk in the hall can adjust the ratio of the balls distributed to the second entrance 640 and the ratio of the balls distributed to the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, since adjustments can be made according to the management policy of the hall, a more convenient pachinko machine 10 can be realized.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72. First, the first random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (a).

FIG. 68A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68A, in the second embodiment, the range of possible values of the first type counter C1 is expanded to 0 to 999.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), “0 to 9” is defined as a range of determination values determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol (see 202a1 in FIG. 68 (a)). As in the first embodiment, the determination value that becomes a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Further, "10 to 998" is defined as a range of judgment values determined to be out of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 68 (a)), and the judgment value determined to be a small hit of the first special symbol. "999" is specified as the range. Further, "10, 11" is defined as a range of judgment values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 68 (a)), and the judgment value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. The range is defined as "12 to 999" (see 202a3 in FIG. 68 (a)).

On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol, the range of the judgment value that becomes a big hit, the judgment value that becomes a deviation, and the range of the judgment value that becomes a small hit are all the first special symbol and the first. It is common with 2 special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), "0 to 10" is defined as the range of the determination values determined to be a big hit (see 202a4 in FIG. 68 (a)), and the determination is determined to be out of order. “11” is specified as the value (see 202a5 in FIG. 68 (a)), and “12 to 999” is specified as the determination value determined to be a small hit (see 202a6 in FIG. 68 (a)).

As described above, in the second embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is different between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is obtained. Then, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is extremely high. As a result, the number of balls consumed when hitting left in the probability variation mode and the lottery of the first special symbol will result in a small hit, and the balls will enter the special figure 1 small hit winning opening 655a. It is configured so that the number of prize balls to be paid out is equal to that of the prize balls. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game efficiency when left-handed in the probability variation mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

The small hit of the second special symbol and the small hit of the first special symbol are configured so that the number of prize balls that the player can obtain is different, and the small hit of the first special symbol has more prizes. It is configured so that you can get a ball. On the other hand, in the small hit of the second special symbol, as in the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 650a is opened only for 0.2 seconds, which makes it difficult for the player to win the prize ball. Therefore, if you hit right at normal times, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, it is easy to determine the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous even if it becomes a big hit, and even if it becomes a small hit, the prize ball Since it is almost impossible to obtain, it is disadvantageous for the player compared to the case of hitting left. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which right-handed strikes are normally performed.

Next, the first type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the second embodiment, three types of jackpots A2 to C2 are provided as jackpot types of the first special symbol, and jackpot D2 is provided as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. , E2 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), "big hit A2" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9". (See 202b1 in FIG. 68 (b)). This "big hit A2" has 16 rounds, and is a big hit in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are counter values that become "big hit A2", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit A" is opened in each round of big hits until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until 6 balls are won. Therefore, if the player keeps hitting right in each round, it is almost certain that the maximum number (6) of balls can be won in the specific winning opening 650a before 30 seconds have passed. , You can get a lot of prize balls when you reach the jackpot A.

With respect to the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 69" in association with "big hit B2" (see 202b2 in FIG. 68 (b)). .. This "big hit B2" has 7 rounds, and is a big hit in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 60 counter values are "big hit B2", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B2" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100). Like the "big hit A2", this "big hit B2" is opened until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until six balls are won in each round of the big hit. Therefore, as with the "big hit A2", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

With respect to the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "big hit C2" (see 202b3 in FIG. 68 (b)). .. This "big hit C2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is two and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 30 are counter values that become "big hit C2", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C2" is determined. The ratio is 30% (30/100). Similar to "Big hit A2" and "Big hit B2", this "big hit C2" is opened until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until 6 balls are won in each round of the big hit. .. Therefore, as with "big hit A" and "big hit B", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

In this way, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, the prize balls for 2, 7 or 16 rounds can be paid out, and the game state after the big hit is almost certainly changed mode. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player regardless of the jackpot type. In addition, since the ratio of 7 rounds and 16 rounds, which have a relatively large number of rounds, is high (70% ratio), a large number of prize balls can be expected to be obtained when the first special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, the player can be pleased when he wins a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), "big hit D2" is associated with the second special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0-4". (See 202b4 in FIG. 68 (b)). This "big hit D2" has four rounds, and is a big hit in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, five counter values are "big hit D2", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit D2" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This "big hit D2" is opened until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until 6 balls are won in each round of the big hit. Therefore, a relatively large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), "big hit E2" is associated with the second special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 99". (See 202b5 in FIG. 68 (b)). This "big hit E2" has four rounds, and is a big hit in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 95 counter values are "big hit E2", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E2" is determined. The ratio is 95% (95/100). This "big hit E2" is different from other big hit types, and in each round of big hit, the specific winning opening 650a is opened until 0.2 seconds have passed or until 6 balls are won. Since it is difficult to put a ball into the specific winning opening 650a within 0.2 seconds, the "big hit E2" is a disadvantageous big hit type in which the winning ball cannot be obtained. In addition, as described above, an upper limit (4 times) is set for the number of consecutive probable change states of the special symbol, and if a big hit occurs when the upper limit is reached, the game state after the big hit ends regardless of the big hit type. It is configured to be in a disadvantageous normal mode. Therefore, if the result is "big hit E", the prize ball cannot be obtained and the number of times until the normal mode is changed is subtracted, which is disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, in the second embodiment, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the prize ball cannot be obtained with a high probability (95% ratio) and the remaining big hit until the normal mode is set. The jackpot type (big hit E2) that reduces the number of times is determined. That is, as in the first embodiment, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a high possibility that the result will be unfavorable for the player. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the game can be performed in the hope that the lottery result will be out of order during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the details of the second random number table 202c in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 69, "5-203" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 69). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 69). That is, the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol differ in the number of determination values determined to be hits of the normal symbol by only one. As a result, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, the hit probability can be almost the same as that of the high probability state of the normal symbol.

In addition, as described above, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer than that of the normal state of the normal symbol (3 seconds → 30 seconds), and the electric power when the normal symbol hits. The opening period of the accessory 640b is shortened (1 second x 2 times → 0.1 seconds x 1 time). Therefore, it is more difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol as a total. Therefore, in the probability variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, which is disadvantageous for the second special. It is possible to suppress the execution of the symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a situation other than the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, which is excessively disadvantageous to the player. In addition, during the jackpot set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the maximum number during the jackpot. ..

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 202. As shown in FIG. 70, in the configuration of the RAM 202 in the second embodiment, a probability variation limit counter 203aa and a breakthrough mode counter 203ab are added to the configuration of the RAM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18). It differs in that it is. Further, the difference is that the probability variation setting flag 203h, the probability variation passage counter 203i, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the remaining ball timer 203m, the probability variation effective flag 203n, the probability variation effective timer 203o, and the discharge number counter 203p are deleted.

The probability variation limit counter 203aa is a counter that counts the remaining number of consecutive times in the probability variation state until the normal mode is set. When the normal mode is set as the state after the jackpot ends, the probability variation limit counter 203aa is set to 4 which is the maximum number of consecutive times of the probability variation state (see S1314 in FIG. 78), and each time the probability variation jackpot ends. , The values are subtracted by 1 (see S1311 in FIG. 78). When the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is updated to 0 at the end of the jackpot, the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends.

The breakthrough mode counter 203ab is a counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of the door breakthrough mode effect, and at the end of the jackpots A2 to D2, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set as a counter value (see S1316 in FIG. 78). ), The value is decremented by 1 at the start of fluctuation and updated (see S324 in FIG. 73). In the second embodiment, the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode (the remaining number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode effect ends) is included in the fluctuation pattern command and transmitted. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 reads the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab from the fluctuation pattern command and grasps the remaining number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode effect ends. In particular, since the stored contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are not backed up, if the power is cut off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect is controlled by the voice lamp after the power is restored. It becomes impossible to grasp on the device 113 side.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the information corresponding to the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is included in the fluctuation pattern command and output to the voice lamp control device 113. Even if the power is cut off during execution and the stored contents of RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are cleared, the door breakthrough mode effect is executed by analyzing the fluctuation pattern command received first after the power is restored. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is inside and its progress. As a result, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the effect can be restarted from the continuation of the door breakthrough mode effect after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect from changing before and after the power is cut off, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the content of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a state transition method in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, three types of states, a normal mode, a door breakthrough mode, and a probability variation mode, are switched back and forth. In the second embodiment, the content of the door breakthrough mode is changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, the door breakthrough mode of the first embodiment described above is a probabilistic state of the special symbol and a time saving state of the normal symbol, and shows only a state in which the holding ball of the second special symbol exists. In addition to this, in the second embodiment, the door breakthrough mode is also set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the door breakthrough mode in which the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are set is referred to as the door breakthrough mode 1, and the special symbol is in a low probability state and. The door breakthrough mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is referred to as the door breakthrough mode 2. The door breakthrough mode 1 is shown on the left side of the middle stage of FIG. 71, and the door breakthrough mode 2 is shown on the left side of the middle stage of FIG. 71.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 71, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, the door breakthrough mode is always entered. As mentioned above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for a relatively long time (up to 30 seconds) in each round of the jackpot, so aim at the specific winning opening 650a in order to win the prize ball. When the ball is launched, a large amount of the ball enters the second entry port 640. As a result, at the end of the big hit, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the upper limit value, and after the big hit, the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1) is set.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 71, in the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough modes 1 and 2), basically, the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, or the lottery of the second special symbol is completely missed. 2 When the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes 0, there is a possibility of shifting to another state. The state of the transition destination when it becomes a big hit is common to the door breakthrough modes 1 and 2, but the state of the transition destination when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 is the door breakthrough mode 1. It is different from the door breakthrough mode 2. Specifically, in the door breakthrough mode 1, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without becoming a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the probability variation mode (see the middle left side of FIG. 71). In the probability variation mode, by hitting left, only the lottery of the first special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, can be executed, and the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol increases (for small hits). Since the winning opening 655a is easily opened), the game can be continued until the jackpot of the first special symbol is reached with almost no reduction in the number of balls held. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the other hand, in the door breakthrough mode 2, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without becoming a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the normal mode (see the middle right side of FIG. 71). In the normal mode, the small hit probability is low, so if you hit the left to execute the lottery of the first special symbol, the number of balls you have will continue to decrease until you get a big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the probability variation mode. Become.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 71, in the door breakthrough mode, when the jackpot E2 is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, after the jackpot ends, provided that the number of consecutive probabilistic changes has not reached the upper limit. Shift to probabilistic mode (common to door breakthrough modes 1 and 2). As described above, the jackpot E2 has a short opening time (0.2 seconds) of the specific winning opening 650a, and cannot win a prize ball even if it hits right. Further, also in the display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot E2 and the small hit of the second special symbol are notified of the left-handed strike. Therefore, unless the player intentionally strikes right against the notification, the reserved ball of the second special symbol will not be accumulated during the execution of the jackpot E2, so that the mode shifts directly to the probability change mode after the jackpot E2 ends. To do. In this case, the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa that counts the number of consecutive times of the remaining probability variation states until the mode shifts to the normal mode is subtracted by 1. Therefore, when the jackpot is E2, the prize ball cannot be obtained and the number of probable change states is subtracted, which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 650a repeats the opening operation for 0.2 seconds a plurality of times in the door breakthrough mode, the player wants the opening operation to be all due to the small hit of the second special symbol. It is possible to realize a novel playability that makes you wish.

In addition, when the jackpot E2 of the second special symbol is set in the door breakthrough mode and the probability variation limit counter 203aa becomes 0 (the number of consecutive probability variation states reaches the upper limit), the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Since it cannot be done, the state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode effect, an effect in which the door breakthrough fails is executed, and the transition to the normal mode is notified.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 71, if the jackpot D2 is won during the door breakthrough mode, the door breakthrough mode (either the door breakthrough mode 1 or the door breakthrough mode 2) is performed again after the jackpot D2 ends. Move to. More specifically, if the number of consecutive probabilistic changes has not reached the upper limit, the door breakthrough mode 1 (probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) is set, and the number of consecutive probabilistic states is the upper limit. If it has reached, the door breakthrough mode 2 (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) is set. As described above, when the door breakthrough mode 1 is set, it is advantageous for the player because the player can shift to the probabilistic mode if the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not hit the jackpot. On the other hand, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is set, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), it falls to the normal mode, so it is advantageous to have a big hit. ..

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the probability variation mode, when a big hit of a special symbol is made, the game shifts to another gaming state. Specifically, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and the number of consecutive probabilistic changes has not reached the upper limit (the probabilistic limit counter 203aa is not 0), the door breakthrough mode is started after the jackpot ends. .. On the other hand, when the number of consecutive probabilistic change states has reached the upper limit value (the probabilistic change limit counter 203aa becomes 0), the state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, it is notified that the number of consecutive probable change states has reached the upper limit during the jackpot. That is, the effect of notifying that the state after the end of the jackpot is the normal mode is executed, for example, during the ending period of the jackpot.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode, a prize ball can be obtained with a high probability (95%, which is the ratio at which the big hit E2 is determined). Instead, the remaining number of consecutive times in the probability variation state (value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa) is subtracted, which is an unfavorable result for the player. Therefore, in the door breakthrough mode, the game can be performed in the hope that it will not be a big hit of the second special symbol.

In the door breakthrough mode effect of the second embodiment, if the big hit E2 is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the effect of temporarily failing to break through the door (see FIG. 10A) is executed. Door. If the number of consecutive probabilistic changes has not reached the upper limit (if the value of the probabilistic limit counter 203aa is not 0), the adventurer 811 again challenges the door breakthrough by the so-called revival effect, and as a result, the door breaks through. A successful production is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery for the second special symbol results in a jackpot E2 and the number of consecutive probabilistic changes has reached the upper limit, the revival effect is not performed and the mode shifts to the normal mode as it is. With this configuration, even when the mode is changed to the probability change mode, it is possible to recognize that the remaining number of consecutive times has decreased when the revival effect is accompanied.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the probability variation mode, only when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the state shifts to another state. Specifically, it becomes a jackpot of the first special symbol, and if the number of consecutive probability change states has not reached the upper limit, the door breakthrough mode 1 is entered after the end of the jackpot, and the number of consecutive probability change states has reached the upper limit. In that case, the door breakthrough mode 2 is entered after the jackpot is completed.

In addition, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is set, as a door breakthrough mode effect, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are off (small hit), the door breakthrough fails and the normal mode is entered. The effect of notifying the transition is executed. That is, an effect that is the opposite of the door breakthrough mode 1 (and the door breakthrough mode effect in the first embodiment) is executed. Further, when the jackpot E2 is obtained in the door breakthrough mode 2, the probability change mode is notified through the revival effect as in the case where the remaining number of consecutive times of the probability change state remains in the door breakthrough mode 1.

As described above, in the first embodiment, two types of door breakthrough modes are provided. That is, the door breakthrough mode 1 that shifts to any of the jackpots A2 to D2 when the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has not reached the upper limit, and the state where the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has reached the upper limit (limit). There is a door breakthrough mode 2 that shifts when any of the jackpots A2 to D2 is achieved. Similar to the first embodiment, the door breakthrough mode 1 shifts to the probabilistic mode which is advantageous for the player when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), so that the second special symbol It is advantageous to not win a big hit in the lottery. On the other hand, the door breakthrough mode 2 is internally in a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, and is a state in which the upper limit of the number of consecutive probabilistic change states is reset. Therefore, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed, the mode shifts to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. In this case, by making a big hit of the second special symbol during the door breakthrough mode 2, it is possible to shift to the door breakthrough mode 1 or the probability variation mode, so that the big hit was made by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is more advantageous for the player. In door breakthrough mode 2, if all the reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol come off (small hit) and shift to the normal mode, there is a possibility that a large amount of balls will be consumed before the big hit. Is.

Depending on the type of door breakthrough mode, it may be advantageous for all the reserved balls of the second special symbol to be advantageous, or it may be advantageous for the reserved balls of the second special symbol to include a jackpot. Therefore, when the door breakthrough mode is entered, it is possible to predict which mode the door breakthrough mode is. Then, depending on the type of the predicted mode, it is possible to expect a deviation or a big hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 72, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20B) in that a post-insertion flag 223i is added. doing. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The post-turn flag 223i is a flag indicating that the power was turned on again after the door breakthrough mode was set to the middle stage because the power of the pachinko machine 10 was cut off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode, and the door breakthrough mode was restarted. Is. The post-turn flag 223i is set to ON when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, when the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed and it is determined that the change is other than the last change of the door breakthrough mode effect. (See S5102 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 73 to 79. First, the details of the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S231) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment.

Of the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S301 to S309 and S311, S301 to S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same process as each process of S311 is executed.

Further, in the special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, after the fluctuation pattern is determined in the processing of S307 or S309, the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is read (S321), and the read counter value is read. And, the fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S322).

Further, in the special symbol variation start processing 2 (see FIG. 73) in the second embodiment, after the processing of S311 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is larger than 0 (S323). In the process of S323, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is larger than 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S323: Yes), the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is subtracted by 1. Then (S324), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S323, if it is determined that the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S323: No), the process of S324 is skipped. This process ends as it is.

By this special symbol variation start processing 2 (see FIG. 73), the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect (value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode) can be included in the variation pattern command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the remaining number of times of the actual door breakthrough mode effect from being deviated from the effect mode executed by the voice lamp control device 113. In particular, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily cut off, all the stored contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are cleared. It becomes unknown on the control device 113 side. Even in this case, if the fluctuation pattern command is configured to include the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode, the fluctuation pattern command that is output first after the power is restored can be easily analyzed before the power is cut off. The state of the above can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the effect mode before the power supply is cut off.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the situation where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists is basically only during the big hit and during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the situation is not a big hit, it seems that it is sufficient to determine that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. However, even if the player intentionally or mistakenly hits the right at normal times, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may be 1 or more. In such a case, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the voice lamp control device 113 side doors by notifying that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more by the hold ball number command when the power is restored. There will be a problem that the breakthrough mode effect will be mistakenly recognized as being executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect is included in the fluctuation pattern command and output, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more at the time of power restoration. , It is possible to know whether the door breakthrough mode is being executed, or whether the player has intentionally or accidentally made a right-handed strike at normal times. Therefore, the effect mode after the power supply is restored can be accurately restored to the state before the power supply is cut off.

In the second embodiment, the number of fluctuations until the end of the door breakthrough mode effect is grasped by the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode, and is included in the fluctuation pattern command and output. However, the door breakthrough mode effect is simply produced. The configuration may be such that only the information on whether or not the command is being executed is included in the fluctuation pattern command and output. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to grasp the number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode effect is completed based on the information and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of updating the counter 203ab in the door breakthrough mode on the main control device 110 side, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing 2 (S106) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74. The normal symbol variation process 2 (S106) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.

Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, each of the processes S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 is the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S614 that the normal symbol is currently in the time saving state (S614: Yes), the variation of the normal symbol The time is set to 30 seconds (S631), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S614, when it is determined that the current state is in the normal state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S632), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S620 that the current state is in the normal state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the second ball is entered. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640b attached to the mouth 640 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S633), and the process shifts to S623. On the other hand, in the processing of S620, when it is determined that the current symbol is in the time saving state (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640 are set to ". Set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S634), and shift the process to S623.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter in the normal state of the normal symbol than in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the opening time when the normal symbol hits is short. It is configured to be long. Further, as described above, the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment shows the normal symbol hit in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. The number of judgment values to be judged is different by only one. As a result, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, the hit probability is almost the same as in the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in total, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. It becomes difficult. Therefore, in the probabilistic mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, which is disadvantageous for the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the lottery from being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a situation other than the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, which is excessively disadvantageous to the player. In addition, during the jackpot set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the maximum number during the jackpot. ..

Next, the start-up process 2 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. This start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

Of the start-up processes 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S901 to S910 and S913, the start-up processes (see FIG. 35) S901 to S910 and S913 in the first embodiment, respectively, The same process as each process of is executed. Further, in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, when the process of S910 is completed, the state command setting process for setting the state command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. (S921), the process shifts to S913. The details of this state command setting process (S921) will be described with reference to FIG. 76.

The flowchart of FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S921). In this state command setting process (S921), first, the probability change flag 203g is read (S1801), and the state command is set based on the state of the read probability change flag 203g (S1802). Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently changing (S1803), and if it is changing (S1803: Yes), the data in the execution area and the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q are read out (S1804). .. Next, the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is read (S1805), and the variation pattern command is set based on each read value (S1806). Next, a stop type command is set (S1807), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S1803: No), each process of S1804 to S1807 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

By executing this state command setting process (see FIG. 76), the game state before the power is cut off, the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect, etc. are recorded in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75). It is possible to notify the lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

Of the jackpot control processes 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S1107 to S1109 is executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), first, the specific winning opening 650a is opened. The state is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1122), and this process is terminated. In the second embodiment, the variable winning device 650 is provided in place of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2 are not provided therein. Therefore, since it is not necessary to execute the process of switching the flow path in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77), these processes (S1202 and S1203 in FIG. 38) are deleted.

Further, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: Yes), the jackpot end process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 77). Instead of (see S1110 in FIG. 37), the jackpot end process 2 is executed (S1123), and this process is terminated. The details of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1123) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: No), the winning process 2 is executed (S1124) instead of the winning process (see S1111 in FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. ), End this process. The details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

The jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment is not provided with a process corresponding to the abnormality process (see S1112 in FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. This is determined by whether or not the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65, whereas in the first embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability change state after the big hit is determined. This is because there is a difference in the two embodiments that the gaming state after the jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, in the second embodiment, even if the ball is left inside the variable winning device 650, it does not affect whether or not the ball is in a probabilistic state, and a fraudulent act of leaving the ball inside. It does not hold. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the abnormality processing (see FIG. 41) for determining whether or not an abnormality in which a sphere remains inside the variable winning device 650 is deleted is deleted.

In the second embodiment as well, a process corresponding to the abnormal process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment may be executed. As a result, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs inside the variable winning device 650, an error can be notified at an early stage.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1123) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 (S1123). In the jackpot end processing 2 (S1123), first, the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S1311), and it is determined whether or not the counter value after the subtraction becomes 0.

In the process of S1311, when it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 1 or more (S1312: No), it means that the number of consecutive probabilistic change states has not reached the upper limit value (limit), so the probabilistic change flag. 203g is set to on (S1313), and the process shifts to S1315. On the other hand, in the process of S1311, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa after subtraction becomes 0 (S1313: Yes), it means that the number of consecutive probabilistic variation states has reached the upper limit value. , Set the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa to 4 (S1314) without executing the process of S1313 that turns on the probability variation flag 203g (leaving the probability variation flag 203g off), and shift the process to S1315. ..

In the process of S1315 executed after the process of S1313 or S1314 is completed, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is read (S1315), and the read value is set to the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode. (S1316). Then, a state command is set based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa (S1317). By including the value of the probability change limit counter 203aa in the state command, not only the game state after the big hit but also the remaining number of times until the continuous number of times of the probability change state reaches the upper limit (limit) is grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. be able to. When the processing of S1317 is completed, the jackpot middle flag 203r is set to off (S1318), and this processing is completed.

Next, the details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. As described above, the winning process 2 (S1124) is a process executed in place of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

Of the winning processes 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S1401 to S1404 and S1406-S1408, the winning processes S1401 to S1404 and S1406 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S1408 is executed.

Further, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S1404 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or more (S1431), and the winning number counter If the value of 203j is 6 or more (S1431: Yes), the process shifts to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1431, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 6 (S1431: No), the process shifts to S1406.

Further, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, the processes S1409 to S1420 of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are deleted. These processes are for determining whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability change switch 65e3, and for determining whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 at a normal timing. This is because the processing is unnecessary for the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in which the discharge flow path 65e2, the probability change switch 65e3, and the like are not provided. By omitting these processes, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 80 to 84. First, the start-up process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. This start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) is a process executed instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Of the start-up processes 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, each process of S4001 to S4013 is the same as each process of S4001 to S4013 of the start-up process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. Further, in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, after the process of S4012 is completed, the state at the time of power-on based on the state command and the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The on-time state determination process for determining the above is executed (S4021), and the process shifts to S4013. The details of this on-time state determination process (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this on-time state determination process (S4021). In this input state determination process (S4021), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S4901), and when the fluctuation pattern command is received and determined to be within (S4901: No). , Set the rear image according to the game state at the time of turning on the power (S4902), and end this process. Here, the game state at the time of turning on the power is determined based on the data of the game state storage area 223h updated in the process of S4012 of the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80), and if the current state is the probability change state. Set the back image for the probabilistic state, and set the back image for the normal state if it is the normal state. Since the door breakthrough mode effect is an effect executed during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, there is no possibility of the door breakthrough mode when the power is turned on and the fluctuation is stopped.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4901 (S4901: Yes), then the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S4903). ), It is determined whether the extracted value is 0 (S4904). If the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is 0, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed, and if the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is 1 or more, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. means.

In the process of S4904, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is not 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4904: No), the breakthrough for selecting the effect mode of the door breakthrough mode effect. The aspect selection process is executed (S4905), and the process shifts to S4907. Details of this breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described later with reference to FIG. 82.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S4904: No), the residual fluctuation The production mode is determined according to the time and the lottery result (S4906), and the process shifts to S4907. In the process of S4907, a display variation pattern command is set (S4907) based on the effect mode determined in the process of S4905 or S4906, and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this breakthrough mode selection process (S4905).

In the breakthrough mode selection process (see FIG. 82), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 1 (S5001), and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. If there is (S5001: Yes), then it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is out of alignment (S5002). In the processing of S5002, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is out of alignment (S5002: Yes), then it is determined whether the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is the data indicating the probability change state (S5003). If it is in a probabilistic state (S5003: Yes), the power is cut off and executed during the execution of the variation display based on the hold ball of the last second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode 1 (see the middle left side of FIG. 71). It means that the last reserved ball inside was off (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining fluctuation time, the effect mode for notifying the transition to the probability variation mode is determined (S5004), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5003, when it is determined that the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is the data indicating the low probability state of the special symbol (S5003: No), the door breakthrough mode 2 (middle stage of FIG. 71). It means that the power was cut off during the execution of the variation display based on the hold ball of the last second special symbol in (see the right side), and the last hold ball being executed was off (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining fluctuation time, the effect mode for notifying the transition to the normal mode is determined (S5004), and this process is terminated. By these processes of S5003 and S5004, even if the state at the time when the power is turned on again is during the execution of the final variation display in the door breakthrough mode effect, the door is based on the lottery result and the game state. The result of the breakthrough mode effect can be accurately notified.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5001, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is not 1 (2 or more) (S5001: No), and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern being executed at the time of power restoration is the jackpot fluctuation pattern (S5002: No), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern this time is the jackpot E2 (S5006). In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot is E2 (S5006: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of consecutive probabilistic change states has reached the upper limit (limit) (S5007). The remaining number of times up to the upper limit of the continuous number of times of the probability change state is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the state command together with the game state at the time of turning on the power.

In the processing of S5007, when it is determined that the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has been reached (S5007: Yes), the state after the big hit becomes the normal mode, so that the transition to the normal mode is notified. The process proceeds to the above-mentioned process of S5005. On the other hand, in the processing of S5007, if it is determined that the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has not been reached, the state after the big hit is in the probability change mode, so that the door is successfully breached through the revival effect. The production mode is determined (S5008), and this process is terminated. As mentioned above, this revival effect is that the number of remaining times up to the upper limit of the number of consecutive times in the probabilistic state has decreased due to the jackpot E2, even though the prize ball could not be won. It is a production to show. With this revival effect, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot E2 was won during the door breakthrough mode effect.

Further, in the processing of S5006, if it is determined that the jackpot is not E2 (S5006: No), then it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern this time is the jackpot D2 (S5009). In the processing of S5009, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern this time is the jackpot D2 (S5009: Yes), it is determined to be a special effect mode indicating that the jackpot has been achieved in the door breakthrough mode effect (S5010). , End this process.

Further, in the processing of S5009, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the jackpot D2 (S5009: No), the current fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (small hit), and the current fluctuation. Is not the last variation of the door breakthrough mode, so the effect mode of the breakthrough effect is determined according to the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab (S5011). That is, the mode of the door 814 is determined according to the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode. Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set to the breakthrough effect counter 223g, the flag 223i is set to on after the closing (S5012), and the present process is terminated. By turning on the flag 223i after the power is turned on, it can be determined that the effect is restarted from the middle of the door breakthrough mode when the power is turned on, even when the fluctuation pattern from the next time onward is received.

The door breakthrough mode effect in the second embodiment is basically the same as in the first embodiment, for 5.8 seconds from the start of the ending period of the jackpot to the end of the opening period of the fourth specific winning opening 650a. A series of productions of the production time is set. That is, at the start of the door breakthrough mode effect, the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is determined in advance based on the pre-reading result of each reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, basically, during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, when a new variation pattern command of the second special symbol is received, it is sufficient to execute the predetermined effect mode as it is. However, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door breakthrough mode production, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be cleared, so that the progress status of the door breakthrough mode production and the result of the production will be cleared. Etc. cannot be grasped. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is cut off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and the power is turned on again, the flag 223i after the power is turned on makes it possible to grasp that fact. Then, while the flag 223i is on after the input, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, the door breakthrough mode is based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the fluctuation pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the effect and set the effect mode according to the determination result. With this configuration, the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect can be accurately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

Next, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83. The variation display setting process 2 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. Of the variation display setting process 2 (S4211) in the second embodiment, in each process of S4801 to S4803 and S4805 to S4809, S4801 to S4803 of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S4805 to S4809 is executed.

Further, in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 83) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4803 is completed, the rough variation display mode notified by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 83). The variation pattern determination process for determining the detailed effect mode of the variation pattern is executed based on the variation time) (S4811). The details of this fluctuation pattern determination process (S4811) will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. When the process of S4811 is completed, the display variation pattern command is set (S4812) based on the detailed effect mode of the variation pattern determined in the process of S4811, and the process shifts to S4805.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination process (S4811) will be described with reference to FIG. 84. In the variation pattern determination process (S4811), first, it is determined whether or not the flag 223i is turned on after turning on (S5101), and if the flag 223i is turned off after turning on (S5101: No), the main controller 110 Based on the rough mode of the fluctuation pattern extracted from the output fluctuation pattern command, the detailed production mode of the fluctuation pattern is determined (S5102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the flag 223i is on after the power is turned on (S5101: Yes), the power is turned on again after the power is cut off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, a process for determining the effect mode during the door breakthrough mode effect is executed according to the information of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the lottery result.

Specifically, first, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S5103), and whether the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (that is, the final fluctuation in the door breakthrough mode effect). (S5104). In the process of S5104, when it is determined that the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), then it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is an outlier fluctuation pattern. If it is determined (S5105) and it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is out of alignment (S5105: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current state is the probabilistic state of the special symbol based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h. (S5106).

In the process of S5106, when it is determined that the current state is the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S5106: Yes), the effect mode for notifying the transition to the probabilistic mode (see FIG. 10B) is determined, and the process is performed. It shifts to S5116. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, when it is determined that the current state is a low probability state of the special symbol (S5106: No), the effect mode for notifying the transition to the normal mode (see FIG. 10A) is determined. (S5108), the process shifts to S5116.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5104, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 2 or more (S5104: No), and the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. (S5104: Yes), and if it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation pattern has been notified (S5105: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot is E2 (S5109).

In the processing of S5109, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern this time is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot E2 (S5109: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive probable change states has been reached. If (S5110), the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times has been reached (S5110: Yes), the state after the end of the jackpot E2 cannot be set to the probabilistic mode, so the transition to the normal mode is notified. The process shifts to the process of S5108 for determining the effect mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5110, when it is determined that the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has not reached the upper limit (limit) (S5110: No), the effect mode of the revival effect is determined (S5111), and this process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5109, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the jackpot E2 (S5109: No), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot D2. (S5112), if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the jackpot D2 (S51112: Yes), the production mode of the special door breakthrough mode effect for notifying the jackpot is determined (S5113), and the process is sent to S5116. And migrate.

Further, in the processing of S5112, when it is determined that the hit is not D2 (S5112: No), the fluctuation pattern this time is a deviation pattern (small hit), and the remaining number of fluctuations of the door breakthrough mode effect (S5112: No). Since it means that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is 2 or more, the production mode of the door breakthrough mode effect according to the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode extracted in the process of S5103 is determined (S5114). , The value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set to the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S5115), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of S5116 executed after any one of S5107, S5108, S5111, and S5113 is completed, the flag 223i is reset to off after being turned on, and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is reset to 0 ( S5116), this process is terminated.

By executing this fluctuation pattern determination process, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door breakthrough mode effect, the pachinko machine 10 is produced from the middle of the door breakthrough mode effect after the power is turned on again. The aspect can be restored. More specifically, if the power is cut off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is cleared, so that the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect and the result of the effect can be grasped. You will not be able to do it. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is cut off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and the power is turned on again, the flag 223i after the power is turned on makes it possible to grasp that fact. Then, while the flag 223i is on after the input, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, the door breakthrough mode is based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the fluctuation pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the effect and set the effect mode according to the determination result. With this configuration, the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect can be accurately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has a configuration in which the gaming state after the jackpot is predetermined for each type of jackpot. In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive probabilistic change states of the special symbol, and when the upper limit is reached, even if the probabilistic jackpot is won, the probability after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. It is configured. With this configuration, it is possible to form two types: a door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1) in which the special symbol is in a probabilistic state, and a door breakthrough mode in which the special symbol is in a low probability state. it can. Therefore, when shifting to the door breakthrough mode, there is a possibility of shifting to the normal mode even if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a big hit during the door breakthrough mode is advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the number of consecutive probable change states.

Further, in the second embodiment, the electric accessory 640b is provided for the second entry port 640, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b is difficult to be released, which is normal. In the normal state (low probability state) of the symbol, the electric accessory 640b is configured to be easily released. With this configuration, in the probability variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. , It is possible to suppress the execution of the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a situation other than the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, which is excessively disadvantageous to the player. In addition, during the jackpot set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the maximum number during the jackpot. ..

Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 is information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of the door breakthrough mode effect (value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode). Is included. As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door breakthrough mode production, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 after the power is turned on again is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Only by analyzing on the side, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed, and the progress status when it is being executed. Therefore, the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect can be accurately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

In the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command includes the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode and is output, so that whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the power is restored is controlled by the voice lamp. Although it was configured so that it could be identified on the device 113 side, it is not limited to this. For example, the variable pattern command may include only information on whether or not the second special symbol is on hold after the jackpot is completed. That is, it is not necessary to include the information of the remaining number of fluctuation display times until the door breakthrough mode effect is completed in the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the power is restored during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the type of fluctuation pattern (whether or not it is a hit) notified by the fluctuation pattern command are used. , It may be configured to determine whether or not it is the final variation of the door breakthrough mode effect. With this configuration, the amount of data of the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, the variation pattern command is always output including the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode may be included in the output only for the first fluctuation pattern command. As a result, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is included in the fluctuation pattern command and output, but it is not always necessary to include the value in the fluctuation pattern command. For example, a command for notifying only the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode may be separately prepared. That is, the main control device 110 may notify the voice lamp control device 113 by a command only when the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is changed. With this configuration, the amount of data for the variation pattern command can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, when the power is turned on, the game status is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a state command, and the value of the counter 203ab in the breakthrough mode is notified by a fluctuation pattern command. However, when the power is turned on, the voice lamp is notified. The information to be notified to the control device 113 is not limited to this. For example, the pre-reading result of each reserved ball may be notified again by the winning information command. With this configuration, if the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the power is turned on, not only the fact that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed, but also the result of the door breakthrough mode effect can be obtained. , It can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side when the power is turned on. Therefore, the production mode can be determined in consideration of the result of the production.

<Modification example in the second embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. In the second embodiment described above, the electric accessory 640b is attached to the second entrance 640. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter in the low probability state of the normal symbol than in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640b is longer when the normal symbol is hit. By doing so, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the second entry port 640 in the probability variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

On the other hand, in this modification, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, a storage valve 63a capable of storing (stopping) a ball at the upper part and a ball stored in the storage valve 63a are provided. When the storage state is released, a general winning opening 63 is provided so that the stored ball can enter the ball. Although the details will be described later, the second ball entry port 640 in this modified example is basically provided at a position where it is impossible (difficult) to enter the ball even if the ball is hit right. As an exception, a ball can enter the second entry port 640 only when a right-handed ball is hit while three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a. More specifically, when a right-handed hit is performed while three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, the ball that has flowed down due to the right-handed collision collides with the third stored ball. There is a possibility that the trajectory of the ball will be changed so that the ball can enter the second entry port 640. In this modified example, by releasing the storage state at the normal time and setting the storage state only during the jackpot, the ball can enter the second entry port 640 only during the jackpot. ..

With this configuration, it is not necessary to attach the electric accessory 640b to the second entry port 640. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the electric accessory 64a can be attached to the first ball entry port 64. As a result, as in the first embodiment, in the probability variation mode, the electric accessory 64a is easily released, so that the game can be performed without reducing the number of balls held. Further, by configuring the electric accessory 64a to be attached to the first ball entry port 64, it is set in each of the above embodiments, that is, "a low probability state of a special symbol" and "a time saving state of a normal symbol". It is possible to provide a gaming state that did not exist. More specifically, the game state when the number of consecutive times of the probability change state reaches the upper limit (limit) is set to the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "time reduction state of the normal symbol", so that the probability change mode is set. After the end of (after reaching the limit), a state in which the special symbol lottery can be executed while maintaining the holding ball for a predetermined period (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times) (so-called). The pullback state) can be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately stopping the game after the probability change mode is completed, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" will be referred to as the "pullback mode".

First, with reference to FIG. 85, the game board 13 in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, in the present modification, the electric accessory 64a is attached to the first ball entry port 64 as in the first embodiment. As a result, in the "probability variation mode" and the "pullback mode" in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 64a is easily released, and the ball is easily entered into the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, in the present modification, as in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so as not to be a small hit.

Further, in addition to the second ball entry port 640 and the variable winning device 650, a general winning opening 63 is provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable winning device unit 80. The general winning opening 63 is configured as a winning opening in which one winning ball is paid out when a ball enters. Further, a storage valve 63a is provided vertically above the general winning opening 63. The storage valve 63a can be changed between a protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)) protruding toward the front side of the front view and a buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) buried inside the game board 13. It is configured. In the protruding state of the storage valve 63a, by storing (staying) the ball in the upper portion thereof, it is possible to prevent the ball that has reached the storage valve 63a from flowing down to the general winning opening 63. On the other hand, in the buried state of the storage valve 63a, the ball can pass through the front side of the storage valve 63a. That is, the ball can flow down to the general winning opening 63. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86, but in this modification, the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) at normal times other than during the jackpot, and the storage valve 63a is set at the start of the jackpot. Is variable from the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)). Then, at the end of the jackpot, the storage valve 63a is changed from the protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)) to the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) again.

The protruding state and the buried state of the storage valve 63a will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a protruding state, and FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the storage valve 63a becomes a protruding state with the start of the big hit, the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63 is blocked by the storage valve 63a. As a result, the balls that have reached the flow path are stored (retained) above the storage valve 63a, up to a maximum of three balls. During the big hit, the player cannot get the prize ball unless the ball is won in the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the player almost hits the right side during the big hit. In the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63, nails, windmills, and the like are arranged so that one out of every two balls fired by right-handed movement advances. Therefore, in one round of the jackpot, three balls are stored in the information of the storage valve 63a (see FIG. 86 (a)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when three balls, which is the upper limit number, are stored above the storage valve 63a and the balls are further hit to the right, the right-handed balls are released. , It may collide with the third (last) ball stored by the storage valve 63a. The ball that collides with the third stored ball is reflected in the direction opposite to the flow direction up to that point, and as a result, in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the ball hits the general winning opening 63. On the other hand, the trajectory is such that the ball can enter the second entry port 640 provided on the opposite side. In the modified example of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a is put into the storage state based on the big hit, and the storage state is held until the end of the big hit. Therefore, when a right-handed ball is hit to enter the specific winning opening 650a during a big hit, three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a. When three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a and the player hits the right to obtain a prize ball, the newly launched ball collides with the stored ball. As a result of changing the flow direction, the ball enters the second entry port 640. As a result, the player keeps hitting right to get the prize ball during the big hit, so that the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the maximum number (4 pieces) at the end of the big hit. Can be done. Although not shown, some of the balls launched by right-handed strike do not collide (interfere) with the stored balls in a state where three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a. It flows down in the direction of the specific winning opening 650a. As a result, the ball can be entered into the second entry opening 640 and the specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot.

FIG. 86B is a diagram showing a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As described above, when the jackpot ends, the protruding state is changed to this buried state, and the buried state is maintained (held) until the next jackpot. When the storage valve 63a is in the buried state, the ball can pass (flow down) through the flow path provided above the general winning opening 63. Therefore, the ball launched into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 passes through the front side of the storage valve 63a in the buried state and enters the general winning opening 63, or is generally used. It flows down a flow path toward the specific winning opening 650a, which is provided between the winning opening 63 and the second winning opening 640. In this modified example, the storage valve 63a is buried from the end of the big hit until the next big hit, so that the ball that hits right during normal times enters the second entrance 640. Can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous in normal times, from being executed, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming too disadvantageous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a method of shifting the state in this modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modification, in addition to the four states (normal mode, probability variation mode, door breakthrough mode 1, door breakthrough mode 2) provided in the second embodiment described above, the pullback mode is set. It is provided.

The pullback mode is a state in which a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol are set. In this modification, when the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive probabilistic change states is reached, the state after the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in this modification, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is in the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol is set to 0, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol becomes 0 in the door breakthrough mode 2, the pullback mode is set. ..

As shown in the upper right of FIG. 87, the pullback mode shifts to another mode when the lottery for the special symbol for the set number of time reductions (25 times) is completed without becoming a big hit. there's a possibility that. Specifically, when all the lottery of special symbols for the number of time reductions is missed, the mode shifts to the normal mode. In addition, in the pullback mode, a low probability state of the special symbol is set, and the number of consecutive probabilistic change states is reset. Therefore, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the door breakthrough mode 1 is entered. ..

In this modified example, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is likely to be opened in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the opening control of the electric accessory 64a is the same in both the probability variation mode and the pullback mode, it is difficult to visually determine whether the probability variation mode or the pullback mode is used. In this modification, the player can recognize that the pullback mode has been set when the time saving number of times is completed and the player falls from the pullback mode to the normal mode. In other words, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the pullback mode, it is difficult to understand whether the big hit is in the probability variation mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, by making a big hit in the pullback mode, it is possible to make the player think as if the probabilistic state continues beyond the upper limit of the number of consecutive probable change states. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this modified example, all the reserved balls of the second special symbol were removed in the door breakthrough mode 2 because the probability variation mode and the pullback mode could not be discriminated from the operation of the electric accessory 64a. Even in this case, a production that succeeds in breaking through the door is executed. As a result, when the adventurer 811 succeeds in breaking through all the doors in the door breakthrough mode production, the door breakthrough mode 1 may have shifted to the probabilistic mode, or the door breakthrough mode 2 may have changed to the pullback mode. It can be difficult to tell if the transition has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which it is unknown how long the repetition of the jackpot and the mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (probability variation mode or pullback mode) continues.

As described above, in the modified example of the second embodiment, the ball is configured to be able to store the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 63a, and the ball is hit right depending on whether or not the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 63a. It is configured so that the direction in which the crab flows down can be switched. When the balls are not stored in the storage valve 63a, it becomes difficult for the balls to enter the second entry port 640, while the storage valve 63a stores the maximum number (3) of balls. If so, the flow direction of a part of the newly launched ball is switched by the stored ball, and the trajectory is changed so that the ball can enter the second entry port 640. did. With this configuration, it is possible to configure the storage valve 63a so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 even if the ball is hit right at the normal time when the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state. Further, during the big hit in which the storage valve 63a is set to the protruding state, the ball can be configured to be able to enter the second entry port 640 when hitting to the right. Therefore, it is possible to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit at the end of the jackpot, and it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player, from being executed at normal times.

Further, in the modified example of the second embodiment, when the continuous number of times of the probability change state becomes the upper limit, the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (25 times) is set. The configuration was set. With this configuration, when the number of consecutive probabilistic changes reaches the upper limit, the special symbol lottery is performed without reducing the number of balls held until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (25 times). Can be formed (pullback mode). Therefore, even if the number of consecutive probabilistic change states reaches the upper limit and the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from immediately quitting the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, since both the pullback mode and the probability variation mode are set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, they are configured so that it is difficult to distinguish them from each other from the appearance of the operation of the electric accessory 64a. As a result, even if a big hit is made in the pullback mode, the player can be made to think as if the big hit was made in the probabilistic mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability that makes it feel as if the probabilistic state continues beyond the upper limit of the probabilistic state.

In the modified example of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a is provided above the general winning opening 63, and the state of the storage valve 63a makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. , The configuration is such that the ball can enter the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the general winning opening 63, a storage valve 63a may be provided above the second entry opening 640. Then, the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state during the big hit so that the right-handed ball can enter the second entry port 640, while the storage valve 63a is stored except during the big hit. By keeping the valve 63a in a protruding state, the ball may be configured to be difficult to enter into the second entry port 640. As a result, the general winning opening 63 can be omitted, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the modified example of the second embodiment, the upper limit is set for the number of consecutive times of the probability change state, but instead of this, the upper limit may be set for the number of lottery of the special symbol in the probability change state of 1. That is, when the probability variation jackpot is reached, the probability variation state of the special symbol may continue after the jackpot, for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 130 times. With this configuration, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has been reached, so that the processing load at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. Further, in this case, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is reached, the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are set, while when the jackpot is achieved by the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot is set. With a high probability (for example, 95% of the time), the prize ball can hardly be obtained, and the jackpot type that shifts to the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol after the jackpot may be determined. .. By configuring in this way, as in each of the above embodiments, a novel game property is realized in which the game is played in the hope that the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol accumulated in the big hit will not be a big hit. be able to.

In each of the above embodiments and the modified examples thereof, has the state shifted to a disadvantageous state (normal mode) by the time all the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, which is executed after the big hit, is completed? It was configured to notify whether or not it was done by the door breakthrough mode effect, but it is not limited to this. Regardless of whether it is a reserved ball of the second special symbol, after the big hit, whether or not it has shifted to a disadvantageous state (or advantageous) within the range of the lottery of the special symbol a predetermined number of times is displayed on the door. It may be configured to notify by the breakthrough mode effect. Specifically, for example, in the probabilistic state of a special symbol, every time it is time to draw a special symbol, it shifts (falls) to a low probability state without going through a big hit, separately from the special symbol lottery. Applying the door breakthrough mode effect to the pachinko machine 10 with a specification (for example, a specification that is more advantageous if the lottery result does not correspond to the fall) is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a fall probability of 1/100). May be good. That is, in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the probability change state, for example, the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed until the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed after the jackpot ends. Then, if it has fallen to the low probability state of the special symbol within 100 times, the effect of failing to break through the door may be executed, and if it has not fallen, the effect of succeeding in breaking through the door may be executed. .. Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 having a specification in which the number of lottery for which the probability change state is set is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, 130 times after the big hit), the number of lottery for which the probability change state is set is within the range of the number of lottery hits. It may be configured to suggest (notify) whether the probability change state has ended or not by the door breakthrough mode effect. More specifically, if a big hit occurs during the probability change state, it suggests that it is advantageous to the player (executes a production that succeeds in breaking through the door), and the predetermined number of times (130) without becoming a big hit. When the lottery of (times) is completed, it may be configured to suggest that it is disadvantageous to the player (execute an effect of failing to break through the door). Further, in this case, the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed over the entire period in which the probability change state is set, or for a part of the period (for example, the number of lottery after the big hit is 125 times or more). Only the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed.

Further, for example, as a gaming state after a big hit, a jackpot type (big hit a) in which a special symbol is probabilistically changed until the next big hit and a normal symbol is shortened, and a special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, In the pachinko machine 10 with specifications that have at least a jackpot type (big hit b) that is set to a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol until the end (100 times), the winning jackpot is Whether it is a jackpot a or a jackpot b is configured to be indistinguishable (difficult) from the production, etc., and after the jackpot, before the specified number of lottery (100 times) is executed, It may be configured to notify the game state set after the previous big hit by the door breakthrough mode effect. That is, if the gaming state is a probabilistic state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol, an effect suggesting that it is an advantageous state for the player (an effect of breaking through the door) is executed, and the game state is set. If is a low-probability state of a special symbol and a time-saving state of a normal symbol, an effect suggesting that the player is in a disadvantageous state (an effect of failing to break through the door) may be executed. Further, for example, in a special symbol lottery, a small hit is made with a lower probability than a loss, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a when a part of the probability variation big hit (big hit c) is determined is equivalent to the small hit ( The door breakthrough mode effect may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the same specifications or the specifications that the players have only indistinguishable differences). That is, it is difficult to determine which lottery result is obtained by the production, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, or the like depending on whether the hit is a small hit or the big hit c. Then, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the state is notified by the door breakthrough mode effect after the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the small hit or the big hit c. May be. That is, if it becomes a small hit and the low probability state of the special symbol is maintained, an effect suggesting that the player is in a disadvantageous state (an effect of failing to break through the door) is executed, and the big hit c is obtained. As long as the special symbol has shifted to the probabilistic state, an effect suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state (an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door) may be executed.

In each of the above embodiments, whether or not the state is advantageous (mode) is notified by the door breakthrough mode effect, but the content notified (suggested) by the door breakthrough mode effect is not necessarily limited to the mode. .. For example, it may be configured to notify whether or not the effect mode is changed by the door breakthrough mode effect. More specifically, for example, a door breakthrough mode effect may be used to notify whether or not a highly reliable reach effect is developed, and whether or not a so-called continuous effect is developed to the next step.

In each of the above embodiments, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases up to the upper limit (4) at the end of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to the end of the jackpot. It is applicable if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to the upper limit in a state different from the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), for example, the end of the probability variation state. The holding ball of the second special symbol may be configured to be the upper limit value at the time or at the end of the time saving state. Further, for example, a state in which a small hit is likely to occur (the lottery probability is high or the lottery condition is easy to be satisfied) and a state in which a small hit is difficult to occur (the lottery probability is low or the lottery condition is difficult to be satisfied) are provided. It may be configured to be applied to a state where a small hit is likely to occur.

In each of the above embodiments, the second entrance 640 and the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) are provided on the right side of the game board 13, but the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) is provided during the jackpot. The arrangement may be changed as long as the ball launched toward the ball can enter the second entrance 640. Further, the ball launched toward the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) during the jackpot was configured so that it was difficult to enter the first ball opening 64, but the first ball opening 64 was set during the jackpot. It may be configured so that the ball can enter the ball.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Gameability that is more advantageous if there are no pending reams)
The first discriminating information is provided based on the first ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter and the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The first discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired and the first discrimination means that executes the first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means are different from the first direction. The second discriminant information is provided based on the second ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The second discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired, the second discrimination means that executes the second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination information is stored up to a predetermined number of pieces of information from the acquisition of the second discrimination information to the execution of the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information. A possible discrimination information storage means and a first state in which the game ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a position where it is easy to enter, and a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter, and a ball that is more difficult to enter than the first state. A variable ball-entry means that can be changed to the second state, a privilege-giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the variable ball-entry means, the first determination means, or the first determination means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the second determination means, and a variable game execution means thereof. As the game state after the execution of the variable game by the means is completed, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game state setting means is provided with a game state setting means for setting the game state of the above, and the game state setting means is provided with the specific determination result by the second determination means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the ratio of setting the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed is higher.

According to the game machine A1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter the ball, and the game ball enters the first ball entry means. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. Based on the fact that the second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction can easily enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination is executed by the second discrimination means based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination information is stored by the discrimination information storage means from the acquisition of the second discrimination information by the second discrimination information acquisition means until the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information is executed. It is stored up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. A variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the first state is provided by a game ball launched in the second direction. It is located in a position that is easy to do. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entering means. A variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on the result of the specific judgment obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means. .. As a game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is completed, among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game state of 1 to 1 is set by the game state setting means. The first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed by the game state setting means when the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. The rate of setting is high.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege during the execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the second discrimination information is stored. .. When a specific determination result is obtained by the second determination based on the second determination information, the ratio of being set to the first gaming state, which has a lower degree of advantage than the second gaming state, is high, so that it is stored during the execution of the variable game. In the second determination based on the second determination information, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that a specific determination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel playability can be realized.

In the game machine A1, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, a plurality of variables including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. The variable pattern setting means is provided with the variable pattern setting means for setting any of the variable patterns of the above, and the variable pattern setting means is said to be more than the second variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means. The ratio of setting the first variable pattern becomes high, and when the discrimination by the second discriminating means yields the specific discrimination result, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern becomes higher than that of the first variable pattern. A game machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Is set by the variable pattern setting means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means, the ratio of setting the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the first variable pattern.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means, it becomes easy to set the second variable pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable entry means, so that the variable game is being executed. There is an effect that the second discrimination based on the second discrimination information stored in the above can be expected to not result in a specific discrimination result.

In the game machine A1 or A2, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, the first variable pattern and the game ball to the variable ball entry means rather than the first variable pattern. A variable pattern setting means for setting any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that is difficult for the player to enter is provided, and the game ball is in the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern. When it continues to be launched in the second direction, it is configured for a period at least longer than the period until the second discrimination information of the predetermined number of information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. A game machine A3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1 or A2, the following effects are played. That is, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, the first variable pattern and the second variable, which makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, when the game ball continues to be launched in the second direction, the second discrimination information acquisition means acquires the second discrimination information of a predetermined number of information. It consists of at least a longer period than the period until.

As a result, during the execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, when the player continues to shoot the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege, the second is at least a predetermined number of information or more. Discrimination information is acquired. Therefore, after the end of the variable game, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed each time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that all the second determinations of the upper limit number of times do not result in a specific determination result.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination means is executed with priority over the first determination by the first determination means. Game machine A4.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination means is executed with priority over the first determination by the first determination means. Even if the game ball enters the first ball entry means in a state where the second determination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means, it is possible to suppress the execution of the first determination. Therefore, there is an effect that attention can be drawn by the second discrimination.

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, the game ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a reachable position, and the reached game ball is sent to the first flow path provided with the second ball entry means. The game machine A5 is provided with a distribution means for distributing the ball to the second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A4, the first flow path provided with the second ball entry means and the second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means. Since the distribution means for distributing the game balls is arranged at a position where the game balls launched in the second direction can be reached, the flow direction of the game balls launched in the second direction is biased. It has the effect of being able to prevent it.

In the game machine A5, the game machine A6 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means, so that the game is played during the execution of the variable game. The ball can be alternately entered into the second entry means and the variable entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game ball launched in the second direction from being biased toward the second ball entry means or the variable ball entry means.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, the game ball enters the first position where the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first ball entry means as compared with the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult to ball and a variable control means that controls the variable operation of the variable means are provided. It is difficult to change to one position, and the second gaming state is characterized in that the variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means than the first gaming state. Game machine A7.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, the first position at which the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means and the first position as compared with the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first gaming state, the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means, and in the second gaming state, the variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first gaming state. ..

As a result, in the first game state, the variable means can be easily changed to the first position, so that the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means. Therefore, in the first game state, the game can be played more efficiently, so that there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the game will be in the first game state.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, in the first gaming state, the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained by the discrimination by the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means is set as the first probability. Yes, in the second gaming state, the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained by the discrimination by the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means is set to a second probability lower than the first probability. A game machine A8 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A7, the following effects are played. That is, in the first gaming state, the probability that a specific determination result will be obtained by the determination by the first determination means and the second determination means is set as the first probability. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the probability that the determination by the first determination means and the second determination means will result in a specific determination result is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

As a result, in the first game state, the probability that a specific determination result will be obtained is higher than in the second game state, so that the variable game can be easily executed again with a relatively small number of determinations after the variable game is completed. Therefore, in the first gaming state, it is expected that more predetermined benefits will be acquired in a relatively short period of time, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Perform a specific effect using the ending period of the jackpot and the pending digestion period)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a privilege thereof. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the game execution means is completed. A game state setting means for setting one game state from among the states, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and predetermined during execution of the privilege game. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the period until the end of the award game and the period until the dynamic display of one or a plurality of the identification information executed after the end of the award game ends. The specific effect is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect, and the specific effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the gaming state after the end of the specific effect is the second gaming state. A game machine B1 characterized by this.

According to the game machine B1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. Performed by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the player has a higher degree of advantage than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. One of the game states is set by the game state setting means. The identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the award game, the period until the end of the award game and the dynamic display of one or more identification information executed after the end of the award game The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in the period until the end of. The specific effect is composed of an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the game state after the end of the specific effect is the second game state.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed over the period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of the dynamic display of one or more identification information, and thus the period until the end of the privilege game. Alternatively, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed at the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information of 1.

In the game machine B1, the specific effect executing means is based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied when the game state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second game state. A game machine B2 characterized by executing the above.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, when the game state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second game state, the specific effect is based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. Is executed by the specific effect executing means, so that the second game state is suggested in the specific effect unless a specific determination result is obtained during the execution of the specific effect and the state shifts to the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific determination result will not be obtained during the execution of the specific effect.

In the game machine B1 or B2, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means are obtained. Until the discriminant condition for the acquired discriminant information is satisfied, the discriminant information storage means that can store up to a predetermined number of pieces of information and the discriminant information storage means based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied are stored. Based on the determination means for determining whether or not the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result is included in the determination information, and the determination result by the determination means, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means includes the effect mode determining means, and the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are played. That is, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is the discrimination for the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the information is stored by the discriminant information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the determination means determines whether or not the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means includes the discrimination information corresponding to the specific discrimination result. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determining means. The specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect execution means.

As a result, the discrimination result by the discrimination means can be determined in advance, so that there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode according to the result of the determination actually executed by the discrimination means.

In the game machine B3, as the types of the privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is completed is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and The determination means is provided with a type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of award game types including at least a second privilege game in which the game state after the execution is completed is set to the second game state. Is to determine whether the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, and the effect mode determining means is the determination. Based on the determination that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included by the means, an effect mode suggesting that the game state after the specific effect is completed is the first game state. A game machine B4 characterized by being determined.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B3, the following effects are played. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is completed is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and the first privilege game after the execution is completed. One type is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game in which the game state is set to the second game state. It is determined by the determination means whether or not the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means. Based on the determination by the determination means that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, the effect mode suggesting that the game state after the end of the specific effect is the first game state is produced. It is determined by the mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the game is performed with the expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A game machine B5, wherein in any of the game machines B1 to B4, a predetermined specific period is set as the effect period regardless of the effect mode.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines B1 to B4, a predetermined specific period is set as the production period of the specific production regardless of the production mode, so that the production period is long. Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the result of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the result of the specific effect until the end.

In the game machine B5, the display means for displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means is provided, and the specific period is the privilege game after the specific condition is satisfied. Is determined by the dynamic display period determining means when the period until the end of the process and the determination by the determination means a predetermined number of times are all different from the specific determination result. The gaming machine B6, which is the sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the following effects are played. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means. The dynamic display period is determined when the period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of the privilege game and the determination by the predetermined specific number of determination means are all different from the specific determination result. The sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times determined by the means is set as the specific period.

As a result, the specific effect can be terminated at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for a specific number of times is completed, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be terminated clearly.

In the game machine B6, the dynamic display period determining means is at least until the end of the specific period when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means within the specific number of times after the end of the privilege game. The gaming machine B7, wherein a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of the above is determined as the dynamic display period.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, if a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means within a specific number of times after the end of the privilege game, at least the remaining until the end of the specific period. Since the period longer than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, if a specific determination result is obtained by the determination within a specific number of times, the privilege game is performed before the end of the specific period. Can be suppressed from being started. Therefore, since the privilege game is started before the end of the specific effect, it is possible to prevent the result of the specific effect from being known in advance, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be attracted more attention.

In any of the game machines B1 to B7, an expectation degree suggestion effect execution means for executing an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the second game state is suggested by the specific effect is provided during the execution of the privilege game. A game machine B8 characterized by.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B1 to B7, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the second game state is suggested by the specific effect during the execution of the privilege game is an expectation degree suggestion effect execution means. Since it is executed by, it is possible to give the player the impression that the effect mode during the execution of the privilege game and the specific effect are a series of effects. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

<Characteristic C group> (It is difficult to determine from the attacker's operation whether or not a hold ream occurs)
A privilege ball entry means in which a predetermined privilege is given based on the entry of a game ball, a first position in which the game ball can enter the privilege entry means, and a game from the first position. Based on the variable means that changes to the second position where the ball is difficult to enter, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination by the discrimination means that the first discrimination result is obtained. Based on the fact that the first variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable in the first variable mode and the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means are obtained. The number of times is specified based on the game state setting means capable of setting a game state different from the game state at the time when the determination is executed and the second determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. In the second variable mode, which includes at least a specific variable mode having an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode of the specific number of times, which is executed when all the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the first discriminating result. A gaming machine C1 comprising: a second variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable.

According to the game machine C1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege entry means based on the entry of the game ball, and the first position where the game ball can enter the privilege entry means and its position. The variable means is variable to the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable control means is such that the variable means is variable in the first variable mode based on the fact that the discrimination is executed by the discriminant means based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the discriminant result is a specific discriminant result. Controlled by. Based on the fact that the determination by the determination means results in the second determination result, it is distinguished from the first variable mode of the specific number of times executed when all the determinations by the determination means of the specific number of times result in the first determination result. In the second variable mode, which includes at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to look at, the variable means is controlled to be variable by the second variable control means.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the first determination result or the second determination result is obtained from the variable mode of the variable means. Therefore, it is determined whether or not different gaming states are set. It has the effect of making it difficult for a person to distinguish.

In the game machine C1, the game state setting means can set one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the ratio of setting the second game state is set higher than the ratio of setting the first game state. A game machine C2 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, one game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the rate at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means is set higher than the rate at which the first game state is set.

As a result, when the second determination result is obtained, a disadvantageous second game state is likely to be set, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the first determination result will be obtained.

The game machine C3 is characterized in that, in the game machine C1 or C2, the ratio of the first determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means is set higher than the ratio of other determination results.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the ratio of the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means is set to be higher than the ratio of the other discrimination results. There is a high possibility that the first determination result will be continuously obtained over the number of times. Therefore, even when the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode as the second determination result, it can be made to think that the first determination result may be continuous over a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not different gaming states are set.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the discriminating means executes the discriminating when either the first discriminating condition or the second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition is satisfied. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the game state setting means is set at a high rate of setting the first game state, and the second determination condition is set. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment, the ratio of setting the second gaming state which is disadvantageous is set higher than that of the first gaming state. C4.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C3, the following effects are played. That is, when either the first determination condition or the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied, the determination is executed by the determination means. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the ratio of the first game state being set by the game state setting means is set high. On the other hand, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the ratio of setting the second gaming state which is disadvantageous is set higher than that of the first gaming state.

As a result, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state is likely to be set, so that the first determination condition can be set. The game can be played with the expectation that it will be established. Therefore, when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the discrimination condition that triggered the execution of the discrimination.

In the game machine C4, when the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means and the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the privilege ball entering means is used rather than the second variable mode. The game machine C5 is provided with a third variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable in a third variable mode in which the game ball is easy to enter.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C4, the judgment by the judgment means results in the second judgment result, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first variable state is set as compared with the second variable mode. In the third variable mode in which the game ball is easily entered into the privilege ball entry means, the variable means is controlled by the third variable control means so as to be variable. Therefore, the second determination is based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The degree of advantage in the result can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that the first determination condition is satisfied.

In the game machine C4 or C5, the first ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and the game ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball is provided, and the first determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The second determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the privilege entry means receives the game ball launched in the second direction. A game machine C6 characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to ball.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C4 or C5, the following effects are played. That is, while the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, the second ball is located at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter. A ball entry means and a privilege ball entry means are provided. The first determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, whereas the second determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. Is established.

As a result, when the privilege entry means is changed to the first position and the game is launched in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege, the game ball enters the second entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is easily executed after the privilege entry means is changed to the first position.

In the game machine C6, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means and the discrimination information acquisition means acquire the discrimination information. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the discriminating information is provided with at least discriminating information storage means that can store the discriminating information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until the discriminating by the discriminating means is executed.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C6, the following effects are played. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is obtained. Up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, at least the discriminant information storage means stores the information until the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed.

As a result, when the ball entering the second ball entry means is detected in a situation where the discrimination by the discrimination means cannot be started, the discrimination information used for the discrimination can be stored by the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the wasteful entry of the ball to the second entry means.

In any of the game machines C4 to C7, the determination executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is executed with priority over the determination executed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. A game machine C8 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C4 to C7, the discrimination executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition is based on the discrimination executed based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. Is executed with priority, so that when the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is executed, it is possible to pay attention to the result of the determination.

<Characteristic D group> (Structure in which special 2 start-up prizes are likely to occur during big hits and are unlikely to occur during normal times)
A first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the first discrimination. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the means or the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. As the type of, the type determination for determining the type of one privilege game from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. Based on the means and the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means that a specific determination result is obtained, the first state in which the second determination condition is easily satisfied is set, and the privilege game Based on the fact that the end condition is satisfied, the second state is provided with a state setting means for setting a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied as compared with the first state, and the type determination means is the second state. It is determined that the ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first determination means results in the specific determination result than when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result. The featured game machine D1.

According to the game machine D1, the determination is executed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is executed by the second determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. Will be done. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the scoring game executing means based on the result of the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the type is selected from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. The type of one privilege game is determined by the determination means. Based on the fact that the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means results in a specific determination, the state setting means sets a first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied. On the other hand, based on the establishment of the end condition of the privilege game, the state setting means sets a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied as compared with the first state. The type determination means is such that the ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first determination means results in a specific determination result than when the determination by the second determination means produces a specific determination result. It is configured.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the second determination condition from being satisfied in a state other than when the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity for the first privilege game having a low degree of advantage to be executed can be limited.

In the game machine D1, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information to be used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. D2 is a gaming machine D2 comprising: discriminating information storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discriminating by the second discriminating means.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, the discrimination information for use in the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

As a result, when the second discrimination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed, the plurality of discrimination information acquired according to the satisfaction of the second discrimination condition for the plurality of times is satisfied. Is stored by the discrimination information storage means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the discrimination is not executed even though the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

In the game machine D2, the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means during the execution of the privilege game, and based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, after the end of the privilege game. A game machine D3 characterized in that it executes discrimination.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D2, the privilege is obtained by the second discrimination means based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means during the execution of the privilege game and stored in the discrimination information storage means. Since the determination is executed after the end of the game, the opportunity for the determination by the second determination means to be executed can be concentrated after the end of the privilege game. Therefore, after the end of the privilege game, the game can be performed with the expectation that the determination by the second determination means will not result in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means for which the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and a first position where the game ball is difficult to enter into the entry means. , The variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier for the game ball to enter than the first position, and the variable means from the first position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific determination condition. The variable means is variable to the second position based on the specific determination means for determining whether to change to two positions and the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. The variable control means is provided with a variable control means for controlling such as the above, and the variable control means is the specific determination means in the second state than when it is determined that the variable means is variable by the specific determination means in the second state. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that when it is determined that the variable means is variable, the variable means is controlled so that the period during which the variable means is variable to the second position is longer.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D1 to D3, the following effects are played. That is, the first position in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means in which the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position. Based on the establishment of the specific determination condition, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. Based on the determination that the specific determination means changes the position from the first position to the second position, the variable control means controls the variable means so that the variable means can be changed to the second position. The variable means is in the second position when it is determined that the variable means is variable by the specific discriminant means in the second state than when it is determined that the variable means is variable by the specific discriminant means in the second state. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes long.

As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, in the first state, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily satisfied than in the second state.

In any of the game machines D1 to D4, a ball entry means for which the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and a first position where the game ball is difficult to enter into the entry means. , The variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier for the game ball to enter than the first position, and the variable means from the first position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific determination condition. The variable means is variable to the second position based on the specific determination means for determining whether to change to two positions and the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. The first state is more likely to have a shorter period from the start to the end of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means than the second state. A game machine D5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines D1 to D4, the following effects are played. That is, the first position in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means in which the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position. Based on the establishment of the specific determination condition, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. Based on the determination that the specific determination means changes the position from the first position to the second position, the variable control means controls the variable means so that the variable means can be changed to the second position. The first state is configured such that the period from the start to the end of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means is more likely to be shorter than that of the second state.

As a result, in the first state, the period required for the specific determination means to perform the same number of determinations is shorter than in the second state. Therefore, since it is possible to obtain an opportunity for the variable means to be changed to the second position more times, there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered in the first state.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the ball entry means provided in the specific flow path and the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is difficult to flow down the specific flow path. The opening / closing means that can be changed between the closed state in which the game ball is closed and the open state in which the game ball can flow down, and the opening / closing means thereof are set to the open state based on the first state. The gaming machine D6 is provided with an opening / closing control means for setting the closed state based on the second state.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D1 to D3, the following effects are played. That is, a ball entry means for satisfying the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball is provided in the specific flow path. The opening / closing means is changed between a closed state in which the game ball is closed so as to make it difficult for the game ball to flow down the specific flow path and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. The opening / closing means is set to the open state by the opening / closing control means based on the first state, while the opening / closing means is set to the closed state by the opening / closing control means based on the second state. ..

This has the effect of more reliably preventing the second determination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

The game machine D6 is characterized in that, when the opening / closing means is set to the closed state, a specific number of game balls can be stopped on the upstream side of the opening / closing means. Machine D7.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, when the opening / closing means is set to the closed state, a specific number of game balls can be stopped on the upstream side of the opening / closing means. Therefore, when the open state is set, the stopped game ball can be entered into the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily satisfied in the first state in which the open state is set.

<Characteristic E group> (The fluctuation pattern command from the main to the sub includes information according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the specific effect)
In a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a main control means for performing main control related to the game, and a secondary control means for controlling the game based on a command output from the main control means. , The main control means executes a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. The privilege game executing means, the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means. A specific means different from the dynamic display time determining means for determining the target display time, the information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and the information corresponding to the dynamic display time. The subordinate control means includes a command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least information to the subordinate control means, and the subordinate control means receives the dynamic display time command output by the command output means. Based on the command receiving means for receiving the command and the dynamic display time command received by the command receiving means, the dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time and a predetermined specific condition are satisfied. Based on this, the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect that can be executed over the one or more dynamic display times in the display means, and the specific information included in the dynamic display time command. Based on this, the specific effect end determination means for determining whether or not to end the specific effect and the specific effect end determination means determined to end the specific effect were used as an opportunity for the determination. It is characterized by including a specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect before the end of the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command. Game machine E1 to play.

According to the game machine E1, in the main control means, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the discriminating result by the discriminating means becomes a specific discriminant result, which is advantageous to the player. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. Dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of discrimination by the discriminant means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. A dynamic display time command that includes at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is generated by the command output means. It is output to the slave control means. In the subordinate control means, the dynamic display time is dynamic based on the fact that the dynamic display time command output by the command output means is received by the command receiving means and the dynamic display time command is received by the command receiving means. Display time Specified by means. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined specific conditions, the specific effect that can be executed over one or a plurality of dynamic display times is executed in the display means by the specific effect executing means. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, whether or not to end the specific effect is determined by the specific effect end determination means. Dynamic display time based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination triggered by the determination that the specific effect is to be terminated by the specific effect end determination means, the dynamic display time specified by the specific effect end determination means ends. In the meantime, the specific production is completed by the specific production main hot water amount means.

This has the effect that the specific effect can be preferably ended.

When the game machine E1 determines that the specific effect is to be terminated by the specific effect end determination means, the identification is based on the information according to the determination result by the determination means included in the dynamic display time command. The gaming machine E2 is provided with an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the effect end means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be terminated by the specific effect end determination means, it corresponds to the determination result by the determination means included in the dynamic display time command. Based on the information, the effect mode until the specific effect is completed by the specific effect end means is determined by the effect mode determining means, so that the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the discriminating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the production mode of the specific effect can be preferably set.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the slave control means is included in the dynamic display time command when the power-on determination means for determining the power-on to the game machine and the power-on determination means are determined by the power-on determination means. Based on the specific information obtained, the interruption time determination means for determining whether or not the time when the power of the game machine was cut off was during the execution of the specific effect, and the interruption time determination means for executing the specific effect. The gaming machine E3 is provided with a post-input effect executing means for executing the specific effect based on the determination that the command was in the middle.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, in the slave control means, the power-on of the game machine is determined by the on-off determination means, and the power-on is determined by the on-off determination means. In addition, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, it is determined by the shutoff determination means whether or not the time when the power of the game machine is shut off is during the execution of the specific effect. Based on the fact that it is determined that the specific effect is being executed by the shutoff determination means, the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means after the input.

As a result, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect can be restarted, so that the effect mode differs before and after the power is cut off, which suppresses the player from being confused. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine E3, the specific effect ending means is for terminating the specific effect executed by the effect executing means after inputting the game machine E4.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E3, the specific effect executed by the effect execution means after the input is terminated by the specific effect end means, so that the power of the game machine is turned on during the execution of the specific effect. Even when it is blocked, there is an effect that the specific effect can be preferably ended.

In the game machine E4, the specific effect executing means sets a predetermined specific period as the effect period of the specific effect.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E5, a specific period predetermined by the specific effect executing means is set as the effect period of the specific effect, so that a simple process is performed when setting the specific effect. There is an effect that it can be set with.

In any of the game machines E1 to E5, the main control means acquires by the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means and the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The command output means is stored in the discriminant information storage means, including a discriminant information storage means that can store the discriminant information obtained at least until it is used for discrimination by the discriminant means, up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. An information number command including information corresponding to the number of information of the discriminant information is output to the subordinate control means, and the specific effect executing means is the discriminant information included in the information number command. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of pieces of information.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines E1 to E5, the following effects are played. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in at least the discrimination information storage means until it is used for the discrimination by the discrimination means, up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. The number of information commands including information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means are output to the subordinate control means by the command output means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of information of the discrimination information included in the number of information commands.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed within the range of the number of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means or less, so that the specific effect can be specified even though the dynamic display of the discrimination information is not executed. It has the effect of suppressing the continuation of the production.

In the game machine E6, the information according to the number of information of the discrimination information is obtained from the time when the specific condition is satisfied until all the discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is completed. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that it is composed of information corresponding to the number of remaining information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, all the discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the information according to the number of information of the discrimination information. Is composed of information according to the number of remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means until the end of the process, so that the specific effect is more reliably stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that it can be executed within the range of the number of information of the discrimination information or less.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, and E1 to E7, the gaming machine Z1 is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

Among the game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, and E1 to E7, the game machine Z2 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, and E1 to E7, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and the interest of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of interest effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 (Ab. 2003-325886).
However, further improvement of interest is required.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and a player based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means. As a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player and a game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed, the first game state and the player more than the first game state. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state having a high degree of advantage, and a dynamic display of identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means. Based on the display execution means and the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during the execution of the privilege game, the period until the privilege game ends, and one or more executed after the privilege game ends. The specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect during the period until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, and the game state after the end of the specific effect is the second game. It is a production that can suggest to the player whether or not it is in a state.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. When the specific effect executing means is set to the second gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed. , The specific effect is executed based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means based on a predetermined specific opportunity in the game machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2. The discriminant information storage means that can store the discriminant information acquired by the discriminant information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until the discriminant condition for the acquired discriminant information is satisfied, and the specific condition are satisfied. Based on the above, the determination means for determining whether or not the discrimination information corresponding to the specific discrimination result is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, and the determination means. The specific effect executing means includes the effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode of the specific effect based on the determination result, and the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. ..
The game machine of the technical idea 4 is the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in the game machine described in the technical idea 3, and the game state after the execution is completed is determined by the game state setting means. From among a plurality of types of privilege games including at least the first privilege game set in the first game state and the second privilege game in which the game state after the execution is completed is set in the second game state. A type determining means for determining the type of 1 is provided, and the determining means determines whether the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means. The effect determination means determines the game after the specific effect is completed, based on the determination by the determination means that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included. It determines an effect mode that suggests that the state is the first gaming state.
The game machine of the technical idea 5 is the game machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, and the specific effect is set to a predetermined specific period as the effect period regardless of the effect mode. It is a thing.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the discriminating by the discriminating means results in a specific discriminant result, which is an advantageous privilege for the player. The game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the player has a higher degree of advantage than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. One of the game states is set by the game state setting means. The identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the award game, the period until the end of the award game and the dynamic display of one or more identification information executed after the end of the award game The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in the period until the end of. The specific effect is composed of an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the game state after the end of the specific effect is the second game state.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second game state is specified. Since the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the condition that the condition is satisfied, the second game in the specific effect is performed unless a specific determination result is obtained during the execution of the specific effect and the state shifts to the first game state. The condition is suggested. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific determination result will not be obtained during the execution of the specific effect.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is the discrimination for the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the information is stored by the discriminant information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the determination means determines whether or not the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means includes the discrimination information corresponding to the specific discrimination result. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determining means. The specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect execution means.
As a result, the discrimination result by the discrimination means can be determined in advance, so that there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode according to the result of the determination actually executed by the discrimination means.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is completed is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and the first privilege game after the execution is completed. One type is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game in which the game state is set to the second game state. It is determined by the determination means whether or not the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means. Based on the determination by the determination means that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, the effect mode suggesting that the game state after the end of the specific effect is the first game state is produced. It is determined by the mode determining means.
As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the game is performed with the expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any of Technical Thoughts 1 to 4, the production period of the specific production is specified in advance regardless of the production mode. Since the period is set, it becomes difficult to predict the result of the specific effect from the length of the effect period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the result of the specific effect until the end.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
65a Specified winning opening (privilege entry means in the first embodiment)
65f1 opening / closing door (variable means in the first embodiment)
112 Launch control device (launch means in the first and second embodiments)
203b Second special symbol holding ball storage area (discrimination information storage means in the first and second embodiments)
650 variable winning device (variable means in the second embodiment)
650a specific winning opening (privilege entry means in the second embodiment)
S220 in the first and the variable game execution unit S305 in the second embodiment the first and determining means S307 in the second embodiment, S309 first and second exemplary dynamic display period determining unit S310 first and second embodiments in the form Dynamic display means S406 Discrimination information acquisition means in the first and second embodiments S1004 Second variable control means S1005 Variable control means in the first and second embodiments S1110 Game state setting means in the first embodiment
S1123 Game state setting means in the second embodiment

Claims (2)

Bonus ball entry means that grants predetermined benefits based on the entry of a game ball,
A variable means that can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the privileged ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position.
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of discrimination conditions,
Discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination of the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and
Discrimination information storage means that can store the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means until it is used for discrimination of the discrimination means, up to a predetermined specific number.
A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and
A dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and
Based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result, the discrimination means is used after the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the first discrimination result is started. and variable control means for variably embodiment of the changing means between the first period is a period until a new determination can be executed is controlled to be a first variable aspect,
Based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result, the game state is different from the game state at the time when the determination corresponding to the second determination result is executed. Game state setting means that can set the game state, and
A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means being the second determination result. When,
As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, the first variable that particular variable manner as the first variable aspect and distinguish hard appearance is variable previous SL varying means at least a second variable aspect included A type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a game and a second variable game in which the variable means is changed in a third variable mode different from the second variable aspect.
Corresponding to the first discrimination information among the specific number of discrimination information in a situation where the discrimination information corresponding to the first discrimination result of the specific number is stored in the discrimination information storage means. wherein after the dynamic display is started identity, in the first of the said determination information stored in said discrimination information storage means at the start of the dynamic display of identification information corresponding to the identification information to The variable mode of the variable means during the predetermined first period until the discrimination result corresponding to the discrimination information finally used for the discrimination is shown is an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from a part of the second variable mode. Means to do and
When the discriminant information corresponding to the specific number of the first discriminant results is stored in the discriminant information storage means in a predetermined gaming state, the first of the specific number of the discriminant information is said. The discrimination stored in the discrimination information storage means at the start of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first discrimination information after the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the discrimination information is started. A means for executing the first effect as an effect during the predetermined first period until the determination result corresponding to the determination information finally used for the determination is shown in the information.
As an effect while the variable means is changed in the second variable mode based on the determination result of the determination means being the second determination result in the predetermined gaming state, the first effect A means for executing a second effect configured to include at least a specific effect mode capable of suggesting the same game as the suggested game, and
When the discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means, an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the discrimination using the stored discrimination information may result in the first discrimination result can be produced. A means that can be executed before the discriminating information is used for discriminating the discriminating means.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result is set higher than the probability that the discrimination result other than the first discrimination result becomes a discrimination result. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball.

Images